Sie sind auf Seite 1von 370

FarScan for Windows

Farinon Remote System Control and


Alarm Network Surveillance Software
with Pager and SNMP Service
Version 3.0

Instruction Manual
Part Number IMN-006120-E07
Issue 7, October 1999

Were ISO certified.

Copyright 1999, Harris Corporation. All rights reserved.


FarScan, GlobeStar, MegaStar, Microstar, Quadralink, Urbanet, and VersaT1lity are trademarks of
Harris Corporation. All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies
or organizations.
Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division
350 Twin Dolphin Drive
Redwood Shores, CA 94065-1421

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Contents
Chapter 1

General Information
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Customer Resource Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Business Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Telephone Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Fax Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Information to Provide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Product Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
FarScan Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
FarScan Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Manual Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Automatic Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
AutoPoll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
SelectPoll. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
One-Line Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Full Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Report Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
FarScan Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Dual Port (Monitoring) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
System Management (Security). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Message/Database Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Equipment/Operator Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Hardware Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Contents

Hardwire Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FarScan Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2

1-10
1-10
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11

The FarScan Computer


Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware Code Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FarScan Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master FarScan Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote FarScan Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Master FarScan Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardwire Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3

2-1
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-7

FarScan Installation
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Installing FarScan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
If no other copies of FarScan are found: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
If other copies of FarScan are found: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Database Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
FarScan Database Customize Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Converting FarScan DOS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Conversion Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Connecting the Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Hardwire Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

ii

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Master FarScan to Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Remote FarScan to Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master FarScan to Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At the Radio Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
At the Computer Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote FarScan to Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4

3-13
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-16
3-16

Starting and Connecting FarScan


Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Starting FarScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Full Access (Level 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Limited Access (Level 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
FarScans Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Main Menu Shortcuts (Fast Keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Icon Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
FarScan Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Status Line Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
LED Color Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Connecting FarScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Master FarScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Enabling the System (Equipment) Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Enabling the Dual Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Remote FarScan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Troubleshooting Connection Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Flashing Red Sys LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
White Sys or Dual1 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Green Sys LED (Equipment Doesnt Respond) . . . . . . . 4-20
Flashing Green and White LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Chapter 5

User Information

iii

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Contents

Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1


User Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Editing User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Editing an Existing User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Adding (Appending) a User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Deleting an Existing User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Broadcast Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Equipment/Operator Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Posting Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Reviewing Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Chapter 6

Equipment Files
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Loading a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Equipment File Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Loading a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Creating a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Editing a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Appending a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Printing a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Chapter 7

Equipment Activity
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Activity Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Log Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Summary Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Trouble Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Audible Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Logging Equipment Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
FarScan Log Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Enabling the Log Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Enabling Disk Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Enabling Text Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Enabling Print Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

iv

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Direct Notification Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Reviewing a Disk Log File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving to a Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reviewing a Text Log File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Microsoft Word 6.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Microsoft Excel 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabling a Log File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing a Summary Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Trouble Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing a Trouble Ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing a Trouble Ticket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acknowledging Trouble Ticket Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing Summary Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Activity to Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Audible Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8

7-11
7-12
7-20
7-22
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-26
7-28
7-28
7-29
7-29
7-30
7-30
7-32
7-33
7-35

Manual Commands
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Sending a Manual Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Copying Individual Manual Command Responses . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Command Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
FarScan Equipment Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Manual Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
1DM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
2DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
3DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
1URB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
2URB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
1URB_1DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
1URB_2DM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
2URB_1DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Contents

CAU or DVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Constell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVL_44 or DVT_44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVM_45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVM_8T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVM_DS3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVT_8 or DVT_12 or DV12/16T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVT_16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSTAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSTAR_ME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEGASTAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mSTAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mSTAR_P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qlink_II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDH_1:N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aurora58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9

8-24
8-26
8-28
8-29
8-32
8-34
8-36
8-38
8-39
8-41
8-43
8-45
8-47
8-49
8-50
8-52
8-54

AutoPoll
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master FarScan AutoPoll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote FarScan AutoPoll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master or Monitor Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using AutoPoll as a Master System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using AutoPoll as a Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using AutoPoll. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying Individual AutoPoll Responses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 10

SelectPoll
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating (Appending) a SelectPoll File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a SelectPoll File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

vi

9-1
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-9

10-1
10-3
10-3
10-4
10-8

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Deleting a Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9


Adding a Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Loading a SelectPoll File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Printing a SelectPoll File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Configuring SelectPoll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Using SelectPoll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Copying Individual SelectPoll Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Chapter 11

FarScan Utilities
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Message Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
DVA Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Computer Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Running FarScan Concurrently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Logging On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
External Message Editor Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
DVA Input Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Using FarScan Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Editing Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Restoring Edited Messages to Factory Default. . . . . . . 11-20
Customizing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Icon Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Appearance of Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
Programming DVA Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28

vii

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Contents

Setting DVA Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Copying DVA Parameter Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing DVA Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Relay Output Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Analog Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example for Setting Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example for Setting Temperature Values . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable Alarm Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting PAI Logical Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAI Boolean Equation Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable Alarm Indicator (PAI) Definitions . . . .
Example for Activating a Backup Generator . . . . . . . .
Resetting DVA Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVA Real Time Stamping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 12

11-28
11-29
11-31
11-32
11-35
11-38
11-40
11-41
11-43
11-43
11-45
11-45
11-48
11-49
11-50

FarScan Pager
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Configuring Zones and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Create Equipment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Select Equipment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Edit Equipment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Setting Up the Personnel File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Select the Persons Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Assign Paging Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Change Zone Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Delete a Person From the File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Setting Up Paging Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
ASCII (Text) Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Tone Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Direct Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Assigning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Configuring the Pager System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Acknowledging a Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
To Acknowledge a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20

viii

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 13

FarScan for Windows

FarScan SNMP
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
SNMP Service Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Address Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Adding IP Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Assigning IP Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Removing IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Editing IP Addresses/Subnet Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Adding an IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Removing an IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Defining the Community. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Enabling SNMP Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Chapter 14

Application Notes
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Requirements for a Loop-Protected System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Requirement for a Loop-Protected System with Spurs . . . . . 14-4
Multiple-Site Master Systems Using All-Hardwire
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Recommendations on Alarm Relay Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
External Alarm Relay Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
DS1/DS2 Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Relay Expansion Card and Relay Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
To Install the Relay Expansion Card and
Relay Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
External Relay Kit Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Programming FarScan using the Message Editor Utility . . 14-17
Setting PIO Addresses in FarScan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Programmable External Control Relays
(DVA Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Multiple-Site Master Systems Using Modems or

ix

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Contents

Data Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statistical Information Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SelectPoll Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Does One Use the Tool?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real Time Error Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCE-to-DCE and DTE-to-DTE Ports and Cable Pin
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Null Cables and Loopback Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a FarScan Computer to the GlobeStar Radio . .
Hayes Optima 24 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hayes ACCURA 288 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intel 144/144e Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On Dual Port Connections: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a FarScan Terminal to the MicroStar Radio .
Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make the Physical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure the RTU port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure FarScan for DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure FarScan for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FarScan Master Equipment Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a FarScan Terminal to the Constellation Radio

Index

14-21
14-23
14-23
14-23
14-24
14-25
14-28
14-29
14-29
14-31
14-33
14-35
14-35
14-37
14-39
14-41
14-43
14-43
14-45
14-45
14-45
14-46
14-46
14-46
14-47
14-48

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

This page intentionally blank.

xi

Contents

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

xv

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

CHAPTER 1

General Information
Chapter
Contents

Technical Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3


Describes how to get in touch with Harris if you need technical
support.

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
FarScan Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Gives a brief introduction to FarScan.

FarScan Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5


Summarizes manual commands, automatic polling, activity
logging and the dual port functions.

Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Summarizes system management (security), the message
editor, modem setup and site operator messages.

Hardware Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10


Describes the two types of radio/computer connections.

Product Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11


Explains how the FarScan computer and software are supplied
and configured.

1-1

Chapter 1: General Information

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

1-2

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Technical
Support

FarScan for Windows

Customer Resource Center


If you are experiencing a traffic-affecting or traffic-threatening
situation, technical assistance is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week, including holidays. If you call the Customer Resource Center
during non-business hours, a Product Support Engineer will return
your call within 30 minutes.

Business Hours
Normal business hours for the Customer Resource Center are:
6:30 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. (Pacific Time)
Monday through Friday

Telephone Numbers
The technical support telephone numbers are:
USA only 1-800-227-8332
International (+1) 650-594-3800

Fax Number
The technical support fax number is:
Fax (+1) 650-594-3621

Information to Provide
Please provide the following information when you contact us:
Detailed description of the problem or trouble symptom and what
action caused it to occur.
If FarScan reported an abnormal condition or alarm, provide a
printout of the FarScan activity log. (Refer to Chapter 7,
Equipment Activity.)
Make a screen capture of the display related to the problem or
symptom. (To do this, press the Print Screen button on the
keyboard and paste the image into Windows Paintbrush.)
Write down the FarScan database ID code and software serial
number.
You can find the database ID code and software serial number by
clicking the DB (database) button
in FarScan.

1-3

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 1: General Information

Addresses
The mailing address for the Customer Resource Center is:
Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division
Attn: CRC
330 Twin Dolphin Drive
Redwood Shores, CA 94065-1421
TE
NO

The Customer Resource Center is available on the internet at http://


www.microwave.harris.com/cservice.

Product Training
Training classes are available for FarScan, as well as other Harris
products, at the Redwood Shores, California, San Antonio, Texas
and Montreal, Canada facilities. For class information and
schedules, call one of the following numbers:
USA
Canada

1-4

1-800-227-8332
1-800-465-4654

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Introduction

FarScan for Windows

This chapter gives a brief summary of FarScans capabilities. For


specific information on how to carry out these functions, please refer
to the appropriate chapters.
This manual assumes that you are familiar with Microsoft
Windows and its conventions. Please refer to the Windows
documentation if you need more information.
TE
NO

Some of the images that are used to illustrate this manual may differ
slightly from those that appear on your screen.

FarScan
Overview

FarScan is a computer-based network supervision system that runs in


Microsoft Windows. It serves as a sophisticated, but easy to use,
alarm monitor and control master for a Harris radio transmission
network (including ring configurations) with up to 999 sites.
FarScan for Windows was designed primarily for mouse-driven
navigation, but it can also be used without a mouse. Instructions in
this manual include both mouse-driven and keyboard-only
commands.

FarScan
Functions

FarScan performs the following primary functions:


Manual commands
Polling (AutoPoll and SelectPoll)
Reporting
- To Display (Full Report, Summary Report)
- Logging (Disk Log, Text Log in *.csv format)
- Printer (online or from Disk Log file)
FarScan networking
Paging
These functions are described in more detail on the following pages.

1-5

Chapter 1: General Information

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Manual Commands
With FarScans manual commands, you can remotely control the
Harris radio networks protection-diagnostic system. Some of the
functions available through manual commands are:

Fault management
Performance measurement
Protection switching
System testing

Specific commands and controls vary depending on equipment type.

Automatic Polling
FarScan provides two polling operations: AutoPoll and SelectPoll.
AutoPoll
AutoPoll uses a preconfigured set of commands to interrogate system
status. It provides an automatic, continuously updated display of the
status of all equipment within a network.

TE
O

In this document and in the software, the word equipment refers to


a Harris radio (transmitter and receiver).
SelectPoll
SelectPoll enables you to create a file which identifies specific
equipments and status conditions for automatic interrogation.
SelectPoll can run concurrently with and be displayed with AutoPoll.
The information for selected equipment (up to 999 addresses) may
include:
Equipment number
Summary of system alarms (if any)
Status of the transmitter, receiver, modem, multiplexer, and other
equipment.

1-6

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Reports
FarScan provides system monitoring reports for AutoPoll and
SelectPoll. They can be altered at any time while FarScan is running.
One-Line Report
The one-line report does the following:
Shows commands from which FarScan received a response.
Does not show responses from equipment.
Reports only one equipment at a time.
Full Report
A full report does the following:
Shows commands and responses received by FarScan.
Reports only one equipment at a time.
Time stamps the response when it is received by FarScan
Report Log
FarScan can record all commands and responses in a log. This feature
is useful for archiving network activity, and for troubleshooting
network or equipment problems.
The equipment activity log includes AutoPoll, SelectPoll and manual
command reports, system messages, errors and user IDs.
The FarScan log can be viewed in FarScan, saved as a text-only file,
or it can be printed to an online printer.
Summary Report
The summary report allows the user to view more than one equipment
at a time, and provides the following options:
Click on a equipment number for a list of alarms.
Click on an alarm for a list of equipments with that alarm.
Right-click on the equipment number for the manual command.

1-7

Chapter 1: General Information

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan Networking
Dual Port (Monitoring) Operation
Dual Port enables multiple FarScan users to access the transmission
network for remote monitoring and limited maintenance.
When Dual Port is enabled on the Master FarScan computer, an
additional FarScan computer, connected to it by null modem cable or
modem, can monitor the radio network.
The functions that are available to Dual Port computers are AutoPoll,
SelectPoll and manual command execution.

TE
O

AutoPoll running on a monitoring computer can not clear latched


alarms.

1-8

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Utilities

FarScan for Windows

System Management (Security)


The System Manager or Administrator can control access to FarScan
by enabling or disabling users and their passwords, and by assigning
user access levels.

Message/Database Editor
The message/database editor allows an authorized user to customize
the text (not the context or function) of response messages to polling
and manual command queries.
For detailed instructions on how to use this feature, refer to Chapter
11, FarScan Utilities.

Equipment/Operator Messages
The Equipment/Operator message utility allows an authorized user to
create and post messages for viewing locally at a FarScan site in the
network.

Paging
The FarScan Pager feature provides for automatic paging of
designated service personnel upon the occurrence of defined
equipment alarms in the network. More details are given in Chapter
12, FarScan Pager.

1-9

Chapter 1: General Information

Hardware
Interface

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

The FarScan computer can be connected to the Harris radio network


locally, using the FarScan interface cable, or remotely, using a
modem.

Hardwire Connection
In a local (hardwired) connection, the FarScan computer is connected
directly to the radio with a special interface cable. This type of
connection is necessary to create a secured Master FarScan site.
Line drivers, data channels on a VersaT1lity service channel
assembly, or a leased-line modem can also be used to make a
hardwire connection.

Modem Connection
You can remotely connect a FarScan computer to a Harris radio
through standard communications modems connected to a telephone
line.

1-10

Chapter 1: General Information

Product
Availability

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan Computer
The computer required to use FarScan is supplied by Harris.
However, additional licensed copies of FarScan can be loaded on
IBM-compatible computers that you provide. Please refer to Chapter
2, The FarScan Computer for minimum configuration
requirements.

Software
FarScan is pre-loaded on computers supplied by Harris. A backup
copy is supplied on CD-ROM disc with a companion 3.5 high
density floppy disk.

Additional Service
Harris can supply you with site information files and edited messages
for your specific network.

1-11

Chapter 1: General Information

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

1-12

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

CHAPTER 2

The FarScan Computer


Chapter
Contents

Computer Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3


Lists the minimum requirements for the FarScan computer if it
is supplied by the customer.

Firmware Code Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3


Describes the firmware code issue that must be installed in the
equipment the FarScan computer is connected to.

Installation Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4


Describes the terms used in this section to explain installation.

Connection Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6


Describes the different ways to connect a FarScan computer to
the transmission network. Diagrams for making a null modem
cable are included.

2-1

Chapter 2: The FarScan Computer

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

2-2

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Computer
Requirements

FarScan for Windows

If you are providing your own computer for running FarScan, the
minimum configuration requirements are as follows:
Pentium processor IBM Compatible Computer
Microsoft Windows 95, 98 or NT4 (service pack 4)
32 Mb RAM
CD-ROM Drive
100 Mb free hard drive space
Two COM ports (three if FarScan Pager is used)
Hayes-compatible modem (internal or external)
Mouse
Color VGA/SVGA monitor
Sound card w/speakers
Windows 95,98, NT4.x compatible printer
Uninteruptable power supply (highly recommended)
ASCII (text) or numeric pagers for network monitoring personnel
Recommended paging file size: 100 Mb

Firmware Code
Requirements

The Master FarScan computer should be connected to equipment that


contains the correct issue of firmware code. Refer to the following
list:
DVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Issue 11
DVM-45 (Excell) . . . . . Issue 8
DVM-45 (Non-Excell) . Issue 16
DVM and DVT. . . . . . . Issue 3
MegaStar . . . . . . . . . . . Issue 5 or higher
If Master FarScan is not connected to one of the above products,
FarScan commands 993 (Set System Minor LEDs) and 994 (Set
System Major and Minor LEDs) will result in erroneous No
Response or Site Inquiry AutoPoll responses. These responses will
appear as a change of state and will be logged into the disklog file.

2-3

Chapter 2: The FarScan Computer

Installation
Terms

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Equipment
Refers to the equipment contained in a radio rack. When a site
includes several assemblies, each assembly is a separate equipment.

FarScan Hardware
Includes the required computer and related items, such as
communication ports, printer, and modem. Once it is connected to the
network, FarScan hardware is referred to either as a Master, Remote,
or Monitoring Master computer.

Master FarScan Computer


The Master FarScan computer connects directly to the equipment
network by hardwire or modem. There are no other FarScan
computers connected between it and the equipment.
The Master FarScan computer provides full access to and control of
the radio network.
Recommended uses for the Master FarScan computer are:

2-4

Troubleshooting transmission problems


Running AutoPoll and SelectPoll
Displaying system alarm summary (status report)
Executing manual commands
Activating automatic logging

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Remote FarScan Computer


The Remote FarScan computer connects to equipment through
another FarScan computer, such as the Master or another Remote.
This type of connection provides network monitoring capabilities to
multiple users at offsite locations. Remote FarScans, which are daisy
chained to the Master FarScan computer, enable up to 10 users to
access the network simultaneously for monitoring and maintenance.
STOP

There can only be one daisy chain of computers connected to a radio


network. If there are more than one, erroneous responses and errors
can occur in AutoPoll.
Recommended uses for the Remote FarScan computer are:

Troubleshoot network transmission problems off-site


View Master FarScan AutoPoll and SelectPoll activity
Run SelectPoll independent of Master FarScan
Execute manual commands

The Remote FarScan computer accesses the radio network through


the enabled Dual Port (second RS232C communication port) of the
Master FarScan or another Remote FarScan computer. The
connection can be hardwire or modem.

Monitoring Master FarScan Computer


The Monitoring Master FarScan is a single FarScan computer, usually
a portable computer, that connects directly to the equipment network
and operates like a Master FarScan. There is one exception; the
Monitoring Master is set up for limited AutoPoll activity. It does not
read or reset latched alarms in the equipment. SelectPoll, manual
commands and history logging are identical to Master FarScan.

2-5

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 2: The FarScan Computer

Connection
Types

A FarScan computer can be connected to the radio network two ways:


Hardwired, using the supplied FarScan interface cable
Modem, using two standard modems, one at each end
Each radio network must have one computer designated as Master
FarScan. Additional computers, designated as Remote FarScan,
can access the radio network simultaneously through the Master
FarScan computer.
The illustrations on page 2-8 show the different connection options.

Hardwire Connection
Using this method, the FarScan computer is connected directly to a
radio using a supplied FarScan interface cable.
If you would like to order additional cables, the part numbers are:
Computer Port
25-pin RS232C
9-pin RS232C

Part Number
087-107819-300
087-108906-025

Cable Wiring Diagrams


Figure 1 - Cable 087-107819-300
25-pin male
connector
to
REM CNTL
or
REM COMM
(VersaT1lity)
or to
FARSCAN
(MegaStar)

7
8
20
22

2-6

25-pin male
connector
(RS232C)
to
FarScan
computer

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Figure 2 - Cable 087-108906-025


25-pin male
connector
to
REM CNTL
or
REM COMM
(VersaT1lity)

to
FarScan
computer

6
7

or to
FARSCAN
(MegaStar)

9-pin male
connector
(RS232C)

5
1

Modem Connection
The FarScan computer can be connected to the radio network using
standard modems and a telephone line.
The cable that is used for a radio-to-modem connection is a 25-pin
null modem cable, part number 087-108429-006.

TE
O

Instructions for connecting the computers to the transmission network


are given in Chapter 3 (hardware connection) and Chapter 4 (FarScan
connection).

2-7

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 2: The FarScan Computer

Figure 1.

Hardwired Master FarScan


Master
FarScan
#0

Figure 2.

VersaT1lity Multiplexer or
MegaStar SPU

Modem-Connected Master FarScan


Master
FarScan
#0

VersaT1lity Multiplexer or
MegaStar SPU

3
Figure 3.

Modem-Connected Remote FarScans (With Hardwired Master FarScan)


Master
FarScan
#0

VersaT1lity Multiplexer or
MegaStar SPU

Remote
FarScan
#8

) )
) ) )
) ) )
) ) )
)
)
) )
( ( ( ( ( ( ( (

Remote
FarScan
#4

( (
( (
( (
(

Remote
FarScan
#16
( ( ( ( ( ( ( (

Legend
1 - FarScan interface cable
2 - Modem cable
3 - Hayes-compatible modem
4 - Public or leased telephone line
5 - Null modem cable

2-8

Remote
FarScan
#12

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

CHAPTER 3

FarScan Installation
Chapter
Contents

Installing FarScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3


Explains how to install FarScan on a customer-supplied
computer.

Converting FarScan DOS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10


Describes how to convert FarScan DOS poll, site, equipment,
edited message and DVA parameter files to FarScan for
Windows format.

Connecting the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13


Explains how to physically connect a Master or Remote
FarScan computer to the radio network using a hardwire or
modem connection.

3-1

Chapter 3: FarScan Installation

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

3-2

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Installing
FarScan

FarScan for Windows

If you purchased a FarScan computer from Harris, FarScan has


already been installed for you. If you purchased additional copies of
the software, please make sure each computer you install FarScan on
meets the minimum requirements listed in Chapter 2.

Installation Procedure
To install FarScan, do the following:
Step 1

Turn on your computer and start Windows.

Step 2

Insert the CD-ROM disc into your computers CD-ROM


drive. Insert the companion disk into the floppy drive.

Step 3

Exit all Windows programs.

Step 4

The FarScan autoinstall screen will appear. Select the


program to install.
If you havent already installed the latest version of
FarScan, install it first before installing the other
applications on the CD.

TE
O

If the autoinstall screen doesnt appear within a few seconds,


manually launch the installation application by double-clicking
Setup.exe on the CD.
Step 5

When the registration window appears, enter the serial


number found on the software label or package. The
characters are case sensitive.

Step 6

FarScan will search for existing FarScan directories.


If no other copies of FarScan are found, skip to Step 7.
If other copies of FarScan are found, continue with Step 10.

3-3

Chapter 3: FarScan Installation

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

If no other copies of FarScan are found:


If no other copies of FarScan exist on the computer, the following
window will appear:

Step 7

Press Enter to accept the default path. Otherwise, type in


the entire path (such as C:\FS4W) where the program
should be installed and press Enter. The following window
will appear:

Step 8

Verify that the directory you entered is correct and click


Start Install. Installation will begin.

Step 9

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the


installation.
The FarScan for Windows icons will be installed, and the
Installation Exit window will appear. Click OK.

Installation is complete. To start FarScan, double-click on the


FarScan icon.
Instructions for using FarScan for Windows begin in Chapter 4.

3-4

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

If other copies of FarScan are found:


Step 10 The following window will appear showing the FarScan
directories that already exist:

Step 11 To install FarScan for Windows in a new directory, click


New Directory.
To install FarScan in an existing directory, click Existing
Directory and skip to Step 14.
STOP

It is recommended that you install FarScan for Windows in a new


directory. When you install in an existing FarScan DOS directory, that
versions database and message files will be converted and can no
longer be used by FarScan for DOS.
Step 12 The New Directory window will appear.
To select the default directory shown, press Enter.
To install FarScan in a different directory, type in the entire
path (such as C:\FS4W) and press Enter.

3-5

Chapter 3: FarScan Installation

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 13 To install the new database that came with the FarScan for
Windows CD-ROM disc, insert the companion disk and
click OK. Skip to Step 16.
Step 14 To use existing database files, select FarScan Directory.
TE
NO

You can convert the old database, edited message and poll files to
the FarScan for Windows format at a later time by using FarScan
Converter. Refer to Converting FarScan DOS Files on page 3-10.
Step 15 Click on the directory selection field and highlight the
directory containing the FarScan database files. Click
OK.

TE
O

If you use existing DOS database files, the FarScan for Windows
installation program will convert the necessary files to Windows
format and copy them to the new FarScan directory.
Step 16 In the window that appears, verify that the directory is
correct and click Start Install. Installation will begin.
Step 17 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the
installation.
Step 18 If you are installing a new version of FarScan for
Windows, click Overwrite to overwrite existing icons in
the program group.
TE
NO

Selecting Overwrite will delete any existing FarScan icons and


replace them with new ones.

3-6

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Click Add if you dont want to overwrite the existing


icons. This will add icons with numerical extensions, such
as FarScan_1.

Database Installation

FarScan Database Customize Utility


This utility enables you to build your own FarScan database.
Step 1

Double-click db_cust.exe to extract the database utility.

Step 2

When the following window appears, click Setup.

Step 3

The files will be extracted and copied into a temporary


folder. The DB customize utility will automatically launch
and the following window will appear:

3-7

Chapter 3: FarScan Installation

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 4

The scanning process may take a while. After it is


complete, a list of available products will appear in the
window:

Step 5

Select the products in your network: highlight a product


name and click Add. A check mark will appear next to
the selected product.

Step 6

To remove a selected product, highlight it, and click


Remove.

NOTE: If you select Remove All, all the selected products will be
deselected.
Step 7

3-8

Some Harris products use SNMP MIB in addition to


FarScans database. If at least one of these products is
included in the selection, check Enable Mapping. This
will build both the FarScan and SNMP MIB databases.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 8

After you have selected all the desired products, click


Build DB.

Step 9

Enter a file name for the database and click Save. The
database will be saved into POL, MGT and MGA files.

The FarScan for Windows icons will be installed, and the


Installation Exit window will appear. Click OK.

Installation is complete. To start FarScan, double-click on the


FarScan icon.
Instructions for using FarScan for Windows begin in Chapter 4.

3-9

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 3: FarScan Installation

Converting
FarScan DOS
Files

Introduction
FarScan for Windows comes with a utility that enables you to convert
FarScan 3.26 and 4.0x files to FarScan for Windows format. This
utility, called FarScan Converter, converts the following files and
copies them into the FarScan for Windows directory:
File Type

Convert
From

To

*.SIT

*.EQW

Edited Messages (3.26)

*.MGZ

*.MGY

DVA Parameters (3.26)

Paramtr.DVA

Paramtr4.DVA

Equipment Files (4.0x)

*.EQT

*.EQW

*.POL (DOS)

*.POL (Windows)1

Site Files (3.26)

Poll files (3.26)

1. The old DOS *.POL file will be given a new extension of *.3PO.

TE
O

If you upgraded from FarScan 3.26 or 4.0x to FarScan for Windows


and selected to use existing database files in Step 14 on page 3-6,
the files were automatically converted and copied into the new
directory. You do not need to use FarScan Converter.
The FarScan Converter (DOS2EQW), was loaded when FarScan for
Windows was installed.

3-10

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Conversion Procedure
To use the FarScan Converter, do the following:
Step 1

Launch the DOS2EQW application. (Either double-click


on the DOS2EQW icon or select it from the Windows Start
menu [95 and NT]). The following window will appear:

Step 2

In the FarScan DOS Files window, click on Select file(s)


to convert. The Open window will appear:

3-11

Chapter 3: FarScan Installation

Step 3

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Select the files to convert. To do this, click in the field


under List files of type. Select an option from the pulldown menu.

Your selections are *.sit, *.eqt (equipment files), *.mgz


(message files) and paramtr.dva (DVA parameter).
Click on the file names you want to convert and click
OK. (To select multiple files, hold down Ctrl and click
on each file.)
TE
NO

If you are converting a message file (scan*.mgz), you must also


convert the DVA parameter file (paramtr.dva).

3-12

Step 4

The file(s) will be converted and given a new FarScan for


Windows extension.

Step 5

When the files have been converted, click OK. The


converted files will be saved to the directory where the
original files are located.

Step 6

Copy the converted files from the old FarScan directory to


the FarScan for Windows directory.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Connecting the
Hardware

FarScan for Windows

The instructions in this section describe how to physically connect a


Master or Remote FarScan computer to the transmission network.

Hardwire Connection
Master FarScan to Radio

TE
O

The maximum distance for the FarScan interface cable is 50 feet at


9600 bits per second (b/s).
Figure 1.

Hardwire Connection

FarScan
Computer

FarScan
Interface
Cable

VersaT1lity Multiplexer or
Megastar SPU

To connect a FarScan computer directly to the radio, do the


following:
Step 1

Connect the female end of the FarScan interface cable to


one of the computers COM ports.

Step 2

Connect the other end of the cable to the appropriate


connector on the radio.
For MegaStar, connect to the FARSCAN port on the
Alarm Display card.
For DVA, connect to the REM COM port.
For VersaT1lity, connect to the REM CNTL port on the
mux assembly motherboard.

STOP

Do not use the VersaT1lity equipment keypad at the site where


FarScan is connected while AutoPoll or SelectPoll is running. To do
so can cause erroneous alarms and messages in FarScan.

3-13

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 3: FarScan Installation

Step 3

If you are connecting to a VersaT1lity radio, configure it


according to the procedure given in the radios instruction
manual.

Step 4

If desired, connect a printer to the computer. (Refer to the


printers documentation for connection instructions.)

Remote FarScan to Master


To hardwire a Remote FarScan computer to the Master FarScan
computer, you will need the following:
Null-modem cable
Master
FarScan
#0

FarScan Interface Cable


VersaT1lity Multiplexer or
MegaStar SPU

Null Modem
Cable
Remote
FarScan
#4

3-14

Step 1

Connect one end of the null-modem cable to a serial port on


the Remote FarScan computer.

Step 2

Connect the other end of the cable to a serial port on the


Master FarScan computer.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Modem Connection
Master FarScan to Radio
To connect a FarScan computer to the network using a modem, you
will need the following:
One Hayes-compatible external modem and null-modem cable (for
the radio)
One Hayes-compatible internal or external modem and modem
cable (for the computer)
Telephone line access for each modem
Figure 2.

Modem Connection

FarScan
Computer

Modem
Cable

Null
Modem
Cable
VersaT1lity Multiplexer or
MegaStar SPU
HayesCompatible
Modems

To connect a computer to a radio using a modem, do the following:


At the Radio Site
Step 1

Connect one end of the null-modem cable into the modem.


Connect the other end of the cable to the appropriate
connector on the radio.
For MegaStar, connect to the FARSCAN port on the
Alarm Display card.
For DVA, connect to the REM COM port.
For VersaT1lity, connect to the REM CNTL port on the
mux assembly motherboard.

Step 2

Plug the telephone line into the modem.

Step 3

If the modem is external, connect power to it.

Step 4

If you did not purchase a modem from Harris, set up your


Hayes-compatible modem according to the manufacturers
instructions.

3-15

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 3: FarScan Installation

At the Computer Site


Step 5

Make sure the computers modem is properly connected.

Step 6

Plug the telephone line into the computers modem.

Step 7

If the modem is external, connect power to it and turn it on.

Step 8

Test the modem. Dial a remote number from the computer


to see if a connection is made.

Remote FarScan to Master


To connect a Remote FarScan computer to another FarScan computer
in the network, you will need the following for each computer:
A Hayes-compatible internal or external modem
A modem cable (only required for external modems)
An available telephone line
TE
NO

If the modem was not supplied by Harris, refer to the modems


documentation for setup information.
Figure 3.

Remote FarScan Connection

Master
FarScan
#0

FarScan Interface Cable


VersaT1lity Multiplexer or
MegaStar SPU

Remote
FarScan
#4

3-16

HayesCompatible
Modems

Chapter 3: FarScan Installation

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

To connect a Remote FarScan computer to the network, do the


following:
Step 1

Make sure the computers modem is properly installed and


configured (refer to its documentation).

Step 2

Plug the telephone line into the modem.

Step 3

Connect one end of the null-modem cable to one of the


computers COM ports. Connect the other end to the
modem.

Step 4

Connect power to the modem and turn it on.

Step 5

Test the modem. Dial another computer, such as the Master


FarScan computer, to see if a connection is made.

After you have physically connected the FarScan computer(s) to the


transmission network, refer to Connecting FarScan in Chapter 4 for
instructions on how to make the software connection.

3-17

Chapter 3: FarScan Installation

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

3-18

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

CHAPTER 4

Starting and Connecting


FarScan
Chapter
Contents

Starting FarScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3


Explains how to start FarScan. Includes first-time user
passwords.

FarScans Main Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5


Shows FarScans main window and describes prominent
features, such as the menu bar and keyboard shortcuts, icon
bar, and status indicators.

Connecting FarScan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10


Describes how to turn the FarScan connection (system or dual
port) online and what to do if the connection isnt made.

4-1

Chapter 4: Starting and Connecting FarScan

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

4-2

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Starting
FarScan

FarScan for Windows

Step 1

Launch the FarScan application.

Step 2

In the window that appears, enter your user name and


password. The system is not case sensitive.

Passwords
The default login name and password for FarScan is as follows:
Full Access (Level 7)
User Name: farscan
Password: manager
Limited Access (Level 0)
User Name: harris
Password: farinon

TE
O

Change this login information as soon as possible to prevent


unauthorized access. For instructions, refer to Chapter 5.
Step 3

If you are starting FarScan for the first time, the Open
Database window will appear:

4-3

Chapter 4: Starting and Connecting FarScan

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

If the Open Database window doesnt appear, a database


has already been set as default. To load a different
database, go to page 6-3.
If the Open Database window appears, do the following:
Step 4

Select the Database file. Next to the database field, click


Select. The following window will appear:

If more than one file is available, highlight the desired


database and click OK.
Step 5

Repeat steps 3 and 4 with the Poll and Equipment files.

Step 6

When you have selected the Database, Poll and Equipment


files, click Set as Default. The new files will
automatically load the next time FarScan is opened.

Online Help
When you move the mouse over areas of a FarScan window, contextsensitive help text will appear in the lower left-hand corner of the
monitors screen.
More detailed online help can be acquired by clicking on the Help
buttons in any of the FarScan windows, or by selecting Help and
Contents from the main menu.

4-4

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScans Main
Window

FarScan for Windows

The main window appears when you start FarScan and remains in the
background while you are running other FarScan functions. It is
referred to in this manual as the main window. An example is
shown below:

Main Menu
Icon Bar
FarScan Status

Main Menu
The main menu is located at the top of the main window, and consists
of seven categories. Each category brings up a popup menu when you
click on it. The procedures given in this manual describe which
category to click on and which item to select from the popup menu.
The categories are as follows:
File

Open, Printer Setup, Printer Font Setup, Flush


Print Log, Exit

Connection

System Connection, Dual Port 1 Connection

Operation

AutoPoll, SelectPoll, Manual Command, Summary


Display, Log Review, Log File Transfer,
Broadcasting, Enable Poll to Dual, Disable Poll to
Dual, Equipment/Operator, Pager Confirmation,
Change Access

Configuration

AutoPoll, SelectPoll, System Port Setup, Dual Port


1 Setup, FarScan number, Master Equipment
Number, Log File/Printer Mode, Pager System
Configuration, Audible Alarm, Alarm Panel,
Customer Edited Messages, FarScan Colors

4-5

Chapter 4: Starting and Connecting FarScan

4-6

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Utilities

Equipment File Editor, SelectPoll File Editor,


Authorize, Message Assignment, Personnel File
Editor, Zone Allocation

View

Toolbars, Status Line, File Status, Current Date/


Time, Help Line, Message Window, Pager Log
File

Help

Contents, About FarScan

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Main Menu Shortcuts (Fast Keys)


Some of the popup menu selections have a keyboard shortcut next to
them. These shortcuts enable you to immediately bring up certain
windows or functions. The keyboard shortcuts are as follows:
Shortcut

Function

Chapter

F1

Open online help

F2

Access the menu bar without a mouse

F3

Toggle summary view window on or off

F5

Open the equipment file editor window

F6

Acknowledge alarms

F10

Quit FarScan

Shift+F3

Toggle Summary View window between normal


and condensed views

Shift+F6

Acknowledges all alarms

Shift+F7

Send a remote connect request to Master FarScan

Shift+F9

Open the equipment/operator message file

Ctrl+b

Open broadcast message editor

Ctrl+e

Enable polling capabilities in Remote FarScan

Ctrl+d

Disable polling capabilities in Remote FarScan

Ctrl+F3

Clear the Summary Display window

Ctrl+F6

Toggle the alarm beeper on or off

Ctrl+F7

Switch to a different user access level

Alt+m

Open the manual command window

These functions are described in their respective chapters.

4-7

Chapter 4: Starting and Connecting FarScan

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Icon Bar
The icon bar contains buttons that can be clicked to carry out certain
functions. Most of them correspond to commands in the FarScan
main menu.
To activate a button, click it once with the mouse.
The buttons in the icon bar are described below. The chapter number
describing each function is in parentheses ( ).
Quit FarScan

Flush print log (7)

System connection (4)

Equipment file editor (6)

Dual port connection (4)

SelectPoll file editor (10)

Broadcast messages (5)

Message assignment on/off (12)

Equipment/operator messages (5)

Personnel file setup (12)

AutoPoll (9)

Personnel/zone priority (12)

SelectPoll (10)

Authorize user (5)

Manual commands (8)

File information (1)

Summary view on/off (7)

Customer-edited messages
on/off

Log mode setting (7)


SNMP service enabled/
Review log (7)

4-8

disabled (14)

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

FarScan Status
Status Line Description
The status lines underneath the icon bar display the current activity of
FarScan functions, as well as loaded database information. The
specific items are called out in the following illustration and
described below:

1 - System connection status LED .................................... Chapter 4


2 - Dual Port connection status LED ................................ Chapter 4
3 - AutoPoll status LED .................................................... Chapter 9
4 - SelectPoll status LED .................................................. Chapter 10
5 - Print Log status LED ................................................... Chapter 7
6 - Disk Log status LED ................................................... Chapter 7
7 - Text Log status LED .................................................... Chapter 7
8 - Pager status LED ......................................................... Chapter 12
9 - FarScan number ........................................................... Chapter 4
10- Master equipment number ........................................... Chapter 4
11- Master equipment name............................................... Chapter 6
12- Loaded SCAN database............................................... Chapter 6
13- Loaded equipment file ................................................. Chapter 6
14- Loaded POLL database................................................ Chapter 6
15- Current time and date (make sure the computer is set correctly)
LED Color Definitions
The LEDs in FarScan are used to indicate the status of certain
functions. The LEDs change color depending on the type of activity:
Blue
Green
Red
Yellow
White

The function is inactive


The function is active and normal
(Flashing) There is a communication problem
Dual Port connection made; waiting for authorization
The system is waiting for a connection response

TE
NO

FarScans LEDs do not indicate the presence of alarms in Harris


radios. Refer to Chapter 7, Equipment Activity for instructions on
how to view equipment alarms.

4-9

Chapter 4: Starting and Connecting FarScan

Connecting
FarScan

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Up to 10 FarScan computers can be connected to the Harris radio


network. When the Master FarScan computer has been connected to
the network, up to nine additional Remote FarScan computers can be
daisy chained to it.
TE
NO

There can only be one computer designated as Master in a


transmission network.
If Remote FarScan computers will be daisy chained to the Master
FarScan computer, Dual Port must be enabled in Master FarScan, as
well as each Remote FarScan in the daisy chain.
If you are connecting the Master FarScan computer to the radio
network, follow the instructions under Master FarScan below. If
you are connecting a Remote FarScan computer to the Master
FarScan computer, refer to Remote FarScan on page 4-16.
STOP

Do not connect more than one daisy chain of FarScan computers to


the radio network.

Master FarScan
This type of connection enables the FarScan computer to access the
FarScan network as the Master. It can execute a full range of network
monitoring and maintenance tasks, including AutoPoll, SelectPoll
and manual commands.
TE
NO

Only one FarScan computer can run AutoPoll at a time.

4-10

Step 1

Connect the Master FarScan computer to the network. (See


Chapter 3 for instructions.)

Step 2

If necessary, load the correct database, equipment and poll


files (see page 6-3).

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 3

FarScan for Windows

Select the Master Equipment Number. To do this, select


Configuration and Master Equipment Number from
the main menu. In the window that appears, type the
number of the equipment you want to connect to.

TE
NO

The equipment number may not be the same as the equipment


address. To verify the equipment number and address, select
Utilities and Equipment File Editor from the main menu.
Step 4

Make sure the FarScan Number is 0 (zero). To change the


number, select Configuration and FarScan number
from the main menu. In the window that appears, change
the FarScan number to 0 (zero). Click Ok. (Master
FarScan is always 0.)

4-11

Chapter 4: Starting and Connecting FarScan

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Enabling the System (Equipment) Port


Step 1

Click
or select Connection and System Port
Connection from the main menu.

Step 2

In System Connection window, click Setup. The


Equipment Port Setup window will appear:

If the computer is connected to the radio network by modem, follow


steps 3 through 8.
If the computer is hardwired to a radio in the network, go to step 6.
Step 3

4-12

If the computer is connected by modem, enable Modem


Connection and Check Hardware Connection. Click
Ok.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 4

Enter the telephone number of the modem youre dialing


into and click Connect. The Modem Protocol window
will appear while the modem is being dialed.

Step 5

When the connection is made, the Sys LED will turn green.

Step 6

If the computer is hardwired to a radio in the network,


enable Check Hardware Connection and disable
Modem Connection. Click Ok.

Step 7

In the System Connection window, click Connect. The


Sys LED will turn green.

Step 8

If the system doesnt connect, the Sys LED will be white or


red. Go to Troubleshooting Connection Problems on
page 4-20.

4-13

Chapter 4: Starting and Connecting FarScan

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Enabling the Dual Port


The following instructions may also be used to enable Dual Port in
Remote or Monitoring Master FarScan computers.
TE
NO

Dual Port does not need to be enabled in the last Remote FarScan
computer in the daisy chain.
To enable Dual Port, do the following:
Step 1

Click
or select Connection and Dual Port
Connection from the main menu.

Step 2

In the window that appears, click Setup. The Dual Port


Setup window will appear:

Step 3

Select the COM port being used by the computers modem


or the hardwire connection. Make sure the settings are
correct.

If the FarScan computer is connected to the Master FarScan computer


by modem, follow steps 4 and 5.

4-14

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

If the FarScan computer is hardwired to the Master FarScan


computer, skip to step 6.
Step 4

Enable Modem Connection and Check Hardware


Connection. Click Ok.

Step 5

Click Connect. The modem protocol window will appear


briefly to set the modem to Auto Answer mode. The
Dual1 LED will turn white.

Step 6

If the FarScan computer is hardwired to another computer


using a null modem cable, disable Check Hardware
Connection and Modem Connection. Click Ok. The
Dual1 LED will turn white (wait mode).

4-15

Chapter 4: Starting and Connecting FarScan

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Remote FarScan
A daisy chain of up to 10 Remote FarScan computers can access the
FarScan network through the Master FarScan computer. Each
Remote FarScan computer can execute a full range of network
monitoring and maintenance tasks, including AutoPoll, SelectPoll
and manual commands.

TE
O

Only one AutoPoll can be run at a time.


The Dual Port function, when enabled, allows another Remote
FarScan computer to be connected to the Master FarScan computer,
or to the next Remote FarScan computer in the daisy chain.
Before you can connect Remote FarScan computers, set up the
Master FarScan computer as follows:
Connect the computer to the radio. (See page 3-13.)
Enable Dual Port. (See page 4-14.)
Step 1

Make sure each Remote FarScan computer is using the


same poll file (*.pol or *.mga), equipment database (*.eqt),
password file (*.nkp) and master equipment address as the
Master FarScan computer.

STOP

The password file uses an .nkp extension. If you copy the Master
FarScans password file to another computer, it will overwrite the
existing one. Before copying a new password file onto the computer,
save the existing one in a file such as passwd.old.
Make sure you know what the passwords are in the new file or you
will not be able to log into FarScan.

4-16

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 2

FarScan for Windows

Select the Remote FarScan number. From the main menu,


select Configuration and FarScan number. In the
window that appears, enter a number for the Remote
FarScan. Click Ok.

Each Remote FarScan is identified by a number (address),


starting with #4, and increasing in multiples of four. For
example, if three Remote FarScan computers are daisy
chained to the Master FarScan computer, they would be
given the following numbers:

First Remote FarScan = 4


Second Remote FarScan = 8
Third Remote FarScan = 12
etc.

TE
O

The highest Remote FarScan address available is 40.


Step 3

Click
or select Connection and System
Connection from the main menu. The System Connection
window will appear.

4-17

Chapter 4: Starting and Connecting FarScan

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 4

Click Setup. The Equipment Port Setup window will


appear.

Step 5

Select the COM port being used to connect to the other


computer.
The COM port settings, including baud rate, should be the
same as the computer you are connecting to.

Step 6

If you are using a modem connection, continue with step 7.


If you are using a hardwire connection, skip to step 9.

Step 7

Enable Modem Connection and Check Hardware


Connection. Click Ok.

Step 8

In the Telephone Number field, type in the number of the


modem you will be dialing into. Skip to step 10.

Step 9

If you are using a hardwire connection, enable Check


Hardware Connection and disable Modem Connection.
Click Ok.

Step 10 Click Connect. When the connection is made, the Sys


LED will turn yellow.

4-18

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 11 Type Shift+F7 or open the System Connection window


and click Request. A request for access will be sent to the
Master FarScan computer. When the request is approved
by Master FarScan, the Sys LED will turn green.
Step 12 If you get the message, Access to the system has not been
received. Try again., check the following:
Make sure the Remote FarScan has been assigned the
correct FarScan number (see step 2) and that the Master
FarScan computer has been assigned FarScan number 0.
Make sure each Remote FarScan computer is using the
same poll file (*.pol), equipment database (*.eqt),
password file (*.nkp) and master equipment address as
the Master FarScan computer.
Step 13 Enable polling capabilities by typing Ctrl+e or selecting
Operation and Enable Poll to Dual from the main
menu.
Step 14 You can now monitor the Master FarScans AutoPoll, use
SelectPoll, send manual commands, send broadcast
messages and post Equipment/Operator messages.

TE
O

Remote AutoPoll, SelectPoll and manual command responses will be


displayed in shaded blocks.
Step 15 If the system doesnt connect, go to Troubleshooting
Connection Problems on page 4-20.

4-19

Chapter 4: Starting and Connecting FarScan

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Troubleshooting Connection Problems


Flashing Red Sys LED
If the Sys LED flashes red, the connection has been lost.
If the computer is hardwired to the radio:
Check the cable connections at the back of the computer and at the
radio.
Make sure the interface cable is an RS232 cable.
If the computer is connected by modem:
Check the power cable (external modems only).
Check the telephone cable connection.
White Sys or Dual1 LED
If the Sys or Dual1 LEDs are white, you may be using the wrong type
of cable to interface the FarScan computer with the equipment. Make
sure you are using the FarScan interface cable supplied by Harris.
Green Sys LED (Equipment Doesnt Respond)
If the Sys LED is green, but the equipment doesnt respond, check the
following:
If the computer is connected to the network by modem:
The wrong COM port may be selected. Try selecting a different
COM port in the Equipment Port Setup window.
Check the baud rate settings for the modems and the equipment.
They should be the same. (The baud rate for the equipment can be
found using FarScan.) Refer to the modems documentation for the
correct baud rate.
If the computer is hardwired to the equipment:
Enable Check Hardware Connection in the Equipment Port Setup
window.
Flashing Green and White LED
If the Sys LED is flashing green and white, the modem carrier detect
was dropped or the FarScan interface cable came loose.

4-20

Chapter 4: Starting and Connecting FarScan

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

4-21

Chapter 4: Starting and Connecting FarScan

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

4-22

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

CHAPTER 5

User Information
Chapter
Contents

User Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3


Describes the access levels available to FarScan users.

Editing User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4


Explains how to edit, add and remove FarScan users.

Broadcast Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8


Explains how send broadcast messages to all FarScan
computers connected to the network.

Equipment/Operator Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9


Explains how to edit Equipment/Operator messages.

5-1

Chapter 5: User Information

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

5-2

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

User Access
Levels

FarScan for Windows

When you log on to FarScan, you enter a user name and password
that has been assigned a specific access level.

TE
O

To change access while you are logged into FarScan, press Shift+F7
or select Operation and Change Access from the main menu. In
the window that appears, enter the name and password associated
with the desired access level.
FarScan uses a seven-level password priority system, maintained by
the FarScan System Manager, that controls access to certain FarScan
operations. The access levels and degree of authorization for each are
defined as follows:
Access
Level

Function

Logon
Capability

Password
Enable/
Disable

Define
Access
Priorities

AutoPoll/
SelectPoll
Access

Manual
Command
Access

System Manager

yes

yes

yes

yes

full

Control

yes

no

no

yes

limited

Reserved

Passive Reporting
(Level 2)

yes

no

no

yes

limited (fewer
than level 6)

Passive Reporting
(Level 1)

yes

no

no

yes

limited (fewer
than level 4)

Reserved

Reserved

no

limited SelectPoll
(few commands
available)

limited (fewer
than level 3)

Passive Polling

yes

no

5-3

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 5: User Information

Editing User
Information

FarScan provides the System Manager with the ability to maintain a


list of FarScan users and control their access levels (refer to the table
on page 5-3).

TE
O

If FarScan was recently installed, the System Manager should follow


the steps under Editing an Existing User to change the login
information that is printed in this manual.
FarScans user editor feature can be accessed in one of two ways:
Under Utilities in the main menu, select Authorize.
Click

An Authorize window will appear:

5-4

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Editing an Existing User


To edit the information for an existing user, do the following:
Step 1

Highlight the users name to be edited. For example, if you


are changing the factory-defined users, highlight
FARSCAN.

Step 2

Click Edit. An Edit Attributes window will appear:

Step 3

Select the user status: Active or Inactive.

TE
O

To remove a user from the system, select Inactive. This will not
remove the users name from the list, but it will prevent access to the
system using that name.
Step 4

If the user status is Active, select the appropriate access


level. (Refer to the table in User Access Levels on page
5-3.)

5-5

Chapter 5: User Information

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Adding (Appending) a User


To add (append) a user to the list, do the following:

5-6

Step 1

In the Authorize window, click Append. The Add User


window will appear:

Step 2

Type the users name. Press Tab.

Step 3

Enter the users password. Click OK.

Step 4

Re-enter the password. Click OK. The new user will be


added to the list as an Inactive User.

Step 5

Highlight the new user name and click Edit. The Edit
Attributes window will appear.

Step 6

Select Active status and assign a priority access level.


Click OK.

Step 7

Click OK in the Authorize window to save the changes


and return to the main window.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Deleting an
Existing User

FarScan for Windows

Once a user has been added to the user list, the name cannot be
removed.
You can disable a users access to FarScan by doing the following:
Step 1

Highlight the users name to be disabled.

Step 2

Click Edit. The Edit Attributes window will appear:

Step 3

Select Inactive status. Click OK.


The user will be designated as an inactive user and will not
be able to access the system under that name.

Step 4

To reinstate the user as an active user, repeat steps 1 and 2.


In the Edit Attributes window, select Active.

!
Be careful not to designate all users that have Access Level 7 as
Inactive. If you do so, there will be no way to define access and
enable passwords once you exit the program.

5-7

Chapter 5: User Information

Broadcast
Messages

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

When Remote FarScans are daisy chained to Master FarScan, emailtype messages can be broadcast to all Dual Port FarScans. To use the
Broadcast Messages feature, do the following:
Step 1

If necessary, enable the Dual Port connection for the


Master FarScan computer. (See page 4-14.)

Step 2

Turn the system connection online. (See page 4-12.)

Step 3

If necessary, connect a Remote FarScan. (See page 4-16.)

Step 4

Click
, type Ctrl+b or select Operation and
Broadcasting from the main menu. The Broadcasting
window will appear:

Step 5

Type a message in the transmission field.

Step 6

To broadcast the message and save it on the sending


computers message board, click Transmit and Log.
Otherwise, click Transmit.

TE
O

To save the message without sending it, click Log.


The message will be sent to all FarScan computers connected to the
network. It will appear in the bottom left corner of the computers
monitor and will be saved on the broadcasting windows message
board.
The messages will be saved on the Broadcasting message board until
you click Clear Board.

5-8

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Equipment/
Operator
Messages

FarScan for Windows

Posting Messages
Equipment/Operator messages enable you to record electronic notes
for specific addresses in the radio network. These notes, or messages,
are saved to the Master FarScans hard drive, and can be viewed
locally by any FarScan user. To post a message, do the following:
Step 1

From the main menu, select Operation and Equipment/


Operator. You can also press Shift+F9 or click
.
The Equipment/Operator window will appear:

Step 2

To create a new message file, click Create. A Save As


window will appear:

Type a new file name and click OK.

5-9

Chapter 5: User Information

Step 3

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

To load an existing message file, click Select. An Open


File window will appear:

Select the file and click OK.


Step 4

From the equipment list in the lower left of the Equipment/


Operator window, click on the item to edit the message for.

Step 5

Type the message text in the message window (located in


the top half of the Equipment/Operator window).
To type over existing text, press the Insert key to change
the editor mode to OVR.
To insert text, press Insert to change the editor mode to
INS.

5-10

Step 6

Click Save. Type in the new message file name.

Step 7

Click Close to close the Equipment/Operator window.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Reviewing Messages
Saved Equipment/Operator messages can be viewed locally by any
FarScan user. In addition, messages posted on the Master FarScan
computer can be viewed by Remote FarScan computers.
To review saved Equipment/Operator Messages, do the following:

TE
O

To use a Remote FarScan computer to view Master FarScan


messages, make sure the computer is connected to the Master
FarScan computer and that the connection is online.
Step 1

From the main menu, select Operation and Equipment/


Operator. You can also press Shift+F9 or click
.
The Equipment/Operator window will appear:

5-11

Chapter 5: User Information

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Load an existing message file by clicking Select. Select


the file from the window that appears and click OK.

5-12

Step 2

If you are viewing messages on Master FarScan using


Remote FarScan, click Ask Master. The button will
change to Ask Local.

Step 3

From the equipment list in the lower left of the Equipment/


Operator window, click on the item to review the message
for. The message will appear in the message field.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

This page intentionally blank.

5-13

Chapter 5: User Information

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

5-14

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

CHAPTER 6

Equipment Files
Chapter
Contents

Loading a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3


Explains how to load the equipment database file.

Equipment File Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5


Explains the equipment file editor utility and describes how it
is used.

Loading a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6


Explains how to load an existing equipment file.

Creating a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7


Explains how to create a new equipment file.

Editing a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8


Explains how to make changes to an equipment file.

Appending a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11


Explains how to add equipment information to an equipment
file.

Printing a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12


Explains how to print a hardcopy of an equipment file.

6-1

Chapter 6: Equipment Files

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

6-2

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Loading a
Database

FarScan for Windows

Before you can edit equipment files or carry out any FarScan
functions, the correct equipment database must be loaded. This
database contains information specific to your network, such as the
equipment types.
TE
NO

If you are connecting a Remote FarScan computer to a Master


FarScan computer, the same databases must be loaded on each
computer.
To load a database, do the following:
Step 1

In the FarScan main menu, click File and select Open.


The Open Database window will appear:

Step 2

Three files are listed: Database, Poll and Equipment. To


load a specific database file, click the Select button next
to the current file. An Open window similar to the
following will appear:

6-3

Chapter 6: Equipment Files

6-4

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 3

In the Open window, double-click the file name to load, or


highlight it and click OK to select it.

Step 4

If you want the new database file to load when you start
FarScan, click the Set as Default button in the Open
Database window.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Equipment File
Editor

FarScan for Windows

The Equipment File Editor enables you to load an equipment file to


edit it or create a new equipment file. You will need to edit an
equipment file or create a new one if changes have been made to the
network configuration.
There are three ways to access the Equipment File Editor window:
Under Utilities in the main menu, select Equipment File Editor
Click the

button.

Press the F5 key


The Equipment File Editor window will appear:

Existing equipment files will be listed in the upper portion of the


window. You can edit or create equipment files with this utility.

6-5

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 6: Equipment Files

Loading a File

To load an equipment file, do the following:


Step 1

In the Equipment File Editor window, click the Load


button or press Alt+L. The following window will appear:

TE
O

If you want to use equipment files from a DOS version of FarScan,


use DOS2EQW to convert these files from *.eqt to *.eqw. See
page 3-10 for instructions.
Step 2

Select the equipment file (*.eqw) to load. Click OK. The


following message will appear:

Step 3

Click Yes to load the new file the next time FarScan is
started. Otherwise, click No. The new file will be loaded.

Step 4

If the FarScan connection is online, click Apply in the


Equipment File Editor window to apply the new database
to the current operation.

STOP

If AutoPoll or SelectPoll is running when the equipment file is


applied, all polling will be restarted and the log file will be timestamped.

6-6

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Creating a File

FarScan for Windows

This function allows you to create a new equipment file for your
system. To create a new equipment file, do the following:
Step 1

In the Equipment File Editor window, click the Create


button. The following window will appear:

Step 2

Enter the total number of equipments. This is the number of


transmitter/receiver assemblies for this equipment file.
Click Ok. The number of equipments you selected will
be listed in the left-hand portion of the Equipment File
Editor window.

TE
O

The maximum number of equipments may be different depending on


the type of FarScan for Windows that was shipped with your system.
Step 3

You may need to edit the equipment information to


correspond with your network plan. Go to Editing a File
on page 6-8.

6-7

Chapter 6: Equipment Files

Editing a File

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

To edit an equipment file, do the following:


Step 1

In the Equipment File Editor window, select an


equipment line.

Step 2

Click the Edit button, press Alt+E or double-click on the


selected equipment line. The following window will
appear:

Step 3

To change the equipment name, click in the Name field


and edit the text.

Step 4

To change the equipment address, click in the Address


field and change the number. Refer to your network plan to
select the correct address.

STOP

If FarScan is connected to a loop system, do not use addresses 256,


512 or 768. In the Equipment File Editor, do not use these addresses
in the Hardware Address field.
If the address you selected is already in use, the following
message will appear:

Click Yes to swap the default address with the correct


address.

6-8

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 5

FarScan for Windows

To change the radio type, click the down arrow in the


Type field. A list of available radio types will appear:

TE
O

If your equipment type is not listed, the wrong database may be


loaded. If you are using the correct database, and the equipment isnt
listed, contact the Harris Customer Resource Center (see page 1-3).
Step 6

Select the equipment you want to change to by clicking on


it. The new radio will appear in the Type field.

Step 7

Choose whether you want AutoPoll enabled or disabled.


Select disabled if the equipment is not in service.
AutoPoll will skip over that equipment when it polls the
network.

Step 8

Select direct or indirect connection.


If the equipment is connected directly to the SCAN
channel, select direct. (This is the default setting.) If the
equipment is connected to a modem or the Dual Port, select
indirect.

Step 9

Click OK to save the changes to the equipment file.

Step 10 Repeat steps 6 through 9 for the remaining items in the


equipment list.
Step 11 Click Save As. In the Save As window, type in the new
file name. Click Ok.
Step 12 If you want to set the new equipment file as default, click
Yes. Otherwise, click No.

6-9

Chapter 6: Equipment Files

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 13 If FarScan is online, click Apply to apply the new


database to the operation in process.
STOP

If AutoPoll or SelectPoll is running when the equipment file is


applied, all polling will be restarted and the log file will be timestamped.

6-10

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Appending a
File

FarScan for Windows

The Append function allows you to add an equipment sequentially


to the current list. To append to an equipment file, do the following:
Step 1

In the Equipment File Editor window, click the


Append button. The following window will appear:

Step 2

Select the equipment you want to change to by clicking on


it. The new radio will appear in the Type field.

Step 3

Choose whether you want AutoPoll enabled or disabled.


Select disabled if the equipment is not in service.
AutoPoll will skip over that equipment when it polls the
network.

Step 4

Select direct or indirect connection.


If the equipment is connected directly to the SCAN
channel, select direct. (This is the default setting.)
Otherwise, select indirect.

Step 5

Click OK to save the changes to the equipment file.

6-11

Chapter 6: Equipment Files

Printing a File

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

To print an equipment file to a printer that is connected to the FarScan


computer, do the following:
Click
, press F5 or Select Utilities and Equipment File
Editor from the main menu. The Equipment File Editor window will
appear:

6-12

Step 1

If you want to print a specific equipment file, click the


Load button, select the file and click Ok. The
equipment file will be loaded.

Step 2

Make sure a printer is connected to the computer, that its


turned on and paper is loaded.

Step 3

Make sure the correct printer is selected. To do this, in


FarScans main menu, select Printer Setup from the
File popup menu. A Printer Setup window will appear:

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 4

Make any changes to the printer setup. Click Ok.

Step 5

In the Equipment File Editor window, click the Print


button or press Alt+P. The contents of the file will be sent
to the printer.

TE
O

To clear data from the printers memory buffer, click


or select
File and Flush Print Log from the FarScan menu bar.

6-13

Chapter 6: Equipment Files

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

6-14

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

CHAPTER 7

Equipment Activity

Chapter
Contents

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Logging Equipment Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Explains FarScan Log Review, enabling and using Disk Log,
Text Log and Print Log modes.

Reviewing a Disk Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12


Describes how to view the information in a Disk Log file using
FarScan Log Review or FarScan. It also describes how to save
a Disk Log file to a floppy disk.

Reviewing a Text Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22


Describes how to import a Text Log file into Microsoft Word
or Excel.

Disabling a Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24


Describes how to disable a log file.

Viewing a Summary Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25


Describes how to use the graphical system status display, and
how to acknowledge and clear alarms.

Using Trouble Tickets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28


Describes how to use trouble tickets to view and acknowledge
specific alarms.

Customizing Summary Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30


Describes how to customize Summary Display. Explains how to
change audible alarms, symbols and display colors.

7-1

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

7-2

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Introduction

FarScan for Windows

FarScan for Windows includes the following features:

Equipment activity logging


Online or offline log review
At-a-glance graphical display of equipment activity
Trouble tickets for all alarms
Audible tone to indicate equipment change of state or alarm

These features are described in detail in the following sections.

Activity Log
The Equipment Activity Log tracks the network polling activity. It
logs all information pertaining to these functions:

AutoPoll
SelectPoll
Manual commands
Monitoring computer activity
Broadcast messages
Errors

To capture interrogation and network activity, activate the FarScan


log mode before executing functions such as AutoPoll, SelectPoll and
manual commands.
Activity can be logged using three methods:
Disk Log - Logs all activity to a computers hard drive in a format
that can only be viewed in FarScan or FarScan Log Review. Data is
recorded in a disk log file with a .log extension.
Text Log - Saves data in a format that can be imported into virtually
any word processing or spreadsheet program. The file is given a .txt
extension.
Print Log - Prints data as it is received to a printer that is connected
to the FarScan computer.
TE
NO

The text or print log file provides detailed troubleshooting


information that you can fax to the Customer Resource Center (see
page 1-3).

7-3

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Log Review
You can review log files (*.log) using FarScan or the FarScan Log
Review program. Use the Log Review program to review stored log
files while AutoPoll or SelectPoll is running in FarScan.
TE
NO

Log Review can not access files that are concurrently logging polling
activity.

Summary Display
The Summary Display option can be turned on or off. When enabled,
it shows a graphical display of the network and the status of current or
gone equipment alarms that are received during polling.
TE
NO

A gone alarm is one that occurred momentarily, but the condition


returned to normal.

Trouble Tickets
Trouble tickets display specific alarm information for individual
commands, or all alarms for a selected equipment. This feature is
available in conjunction with Summary Display. See page 7-28 for
detailed information about using trouble tickets.

Audible Alarm
FarScan provides an audible alarm that sounds when there is a change
in the equipment state, a new alarm, or a gone alarm. The pitch of the
alarm can be changed, and it can be turned on or off.

7-4

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Logging
Equipment
Activity

FarScan for Windows

Equipment activity logs (disk logs) contain the following


information:
Type of command (AutoPoll, SelectPoll, manual command, remote
AutoPoll, remote SelectPoll, remote manual command)
Time and date command was issued
Type of response (change of state or status)
Equipment number (this may be different from the equipment
address)
Equipment name
Command number and name issued
Equipment response
There are three ways to review the information in a log file:
Disk Log File (*.log) - enables user to review entire log or portions
of it using FarScan Log Review (see page 7-12)
Text Log File (*.txt) - enables user to review specific log
information in a text editor, such as Microsoft Word (see page 7-22)
Print Log File - prints specific log file data directly to a printer
connected to the FarScan computer (see page 7-10)

FarScan Log Review


FarScan Log Review was installed when FarScan for Windows was
installed. It is a stand-alone program that allows you to review
previously saved equipment activity logs independently of FarScan.

TE
O

You can not use FarScan Log Review to review data that is in the
process of being logged.

7-5

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Enabling the Log Mode


N

TE
O

Before logging activity, make sure the computers clock is set to the
correct time and date.
To begin logging equipment activity, do the following:
Step 1

7-6

From the FarScan main menu, select Configuration and


Log File/Printer Mode, or click
. The Log File/
Printer Mode window will appear:

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Enabling Disk Log


Step 2

Enter a name for the disk log file in the Disk Log file
name field. It should have eight characters or less, and end
with the extension .log.

Step 3

Click Enable to enable the disk log file. Click OK. The
DLog LED will turn green.

TE
O

If the message, Disk log file already exists appears, click


Overwrite to overwrite existing log data, click Append to append
new data to the existing log, or click Cancel and type a new file
name in the Disk Log file name field.
Step 4

To enable Text Log, go to page 7-8.


To enable Print Log, go to page 7-10.

Step 5

Start the network interrogation process. (Execute


SelectPoll, AutoPoll or manual commands).

The Disk Log file will be available for review after polling is stopped
and the file is closed. To review it, refer to Reviewing a Disk Log
File on page 7-12.
STOP

Disk Log has the potential of using up large amounts of hard drive
space. Compress archived files using a compression utility (such as
WinZip) or store them on floppy disks.

7-7

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Enabling Text Log


Step 6

Enter a name for the text log file in the Text Log file
name field. It should have eight characters or less, and end
with the extension .txt.

Step 7

Select the activity or activities to record. Click the box next


to the activity name to mark it with an x.
AutoPoll - Records all AutoPoll commands and responses.
SelectPoll - Records all SelectPoll commands and
responses.
Manual Command - Records the manual commands
issued and the network responses.
Dual Port - Records activity from Monitor FarScan
computers.
Errors - Records errors encountered in equipment port
operation, such as interruption in polling.
Comments - Records additional information such as
database reloading, date and time stamps, etc.

Step 8

Select the format you would like the log information to


appear in.
Mini Status Display:

Type of command (AutoPoll, SelectPoll or Manual)


Time and date command was sent
Equipment number and name
Command number and name
Equipment type
Alarm responses

ONE Line Display:

7-8

Type of command (AutoPoll, SelectPoll or Manual)


Time and date command was sent
Equipment number and name
Command number and name

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Full Status Display:

Step 9

Type of command (AutoPoll, SelectPoll or Manual)


Time and date command was sent
Equipment number and name
Command number and name
Equipment type
All equipment responses (alarm and normal)

Select the information to be recorded in the report.


Change of Status - Only records changes in status.
All Activity - Records all activity.

Step 10 Click OK. The TLog LED will turn green.


To enable Print Log, go to page 7-10.
Step 11 Start the network interrogation process. (Execute
SelectPoll, AutoPoll or manual commands).

7-9

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Enabling Print Log


TE
NO

As soon as Print Log is enabled and you activate AutoPoll, SelectPoll


or manual commands, data will begin streaming to the printer. If you
want to capture large amounts of information, use the Disk Log or
Text Log modes instead.
Step 12 Select the activity or activities to send to the printer. Click
the box next to the activity name to mark it with an x.
AutoPoll - Prints all AutoPoll commands and responses.
SelectPoll - Prints all SelectPoll commands and responses.
Manual Command - Prints the manual commands issued
and the network responses.
Dual Port - Prints activity from Monitor FarScan
computers.
Errors - Prints errors encountered in equipment port
operation, such as interruption in polling.
Comments - Not available in the print log mode.
Step 13 Select the log information to print:
Mini Status Display:

Type of command (AutoPoll, SelectPoll or Manual)


Time and date command was sent
Equipment number and name
Command number and name
Equipment type
Alarm responses

ONE Line Display:

7-10

Type of command (AutoPoll, SelectPoll or Manual)


Time and date command was sent
Equipment number and name
Command number and name

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Full Status Display:

Type of command (AutoPoll, SelectPoll or Manual)


Time and date command was sent
Equipment number and name
Command number and name
Equipment type
All equipment responses (alarm and normal)

Step 14 Select the information to be recorded in the report.


Change of Status - Only records changes in status.
All Activity - Records all activity.
Step 15 Click OK. The PLog LED will turn green, and the printer
will begin printing equipment activity data.
TE
NO

To clear the printers buffer, click


or select File and Flush
Print Log from the FarScan main menu.
Direct Notification Port
The Direct Notification Port option in the Log File/Printer Mode
window enables you to select a COM or printer port. For example, if
you select a COM port, all messages will be sent through that port to
whatever it is connected to (such as a remote terminal).
If you select the printer port, the messages will be sent to that printer.
TE
NO

This is not the same feature as Direct Notification in the Pager


System Configuration window.

7-11

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Reviewing a
Disk Log File

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

There are two ways to review a Disk Log file: FarScan and FarScan
Log Review. The procedures for reviewing a log file in either
application are nearly identical.
If FarScan is polling the network, you can review archived (closed)
Disk Log files by using FarScan Log Review, a stand-alone program.
For instructions, begin with step 1.
If all polling functions are stopped, and Disk Logging has been
disabled, you can review the log file without exiting FarScan. To do
this, skip to step 3.
TE
NO

You can not review data that is in the process of being logged.
Step 1

Start the FarScan Log Review application.

Step 2

When the FarScan Log Review login window appears,


enter a FarScan user name and password. The Log Review
main window will appear:

TE
O

If the Load Database window appears, select the database files that
apply to the log file you wish to review and click OK.

7-12

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 3

Click
or select Operation and Log Review from
the main menu. The Log Review window will appear:

Step 4

Click File or double-click the Disk Log File Name


field. The Open window will appear:

Step 5

Double-click the log file to review, or highlight it and click


OK.

7-13

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

7-14

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 6

In the Log Review window, double-click on the


Equipment field. The Equipment Selection window will
appear:

Step 7

Select a single equipment, or select All Equipments to


view the data for all items in the list.

Step 8

If you selected a single equipment, go to step 9. If you


selected All equipments, skip to step 10.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 9

FarScan for Windows

If you selected a single equipment, you can choose the


commands to view by double-clicking on the Command
list field in the Log Review window. The Command
Selection window will appear:

All commands are selected as default. To select certain


commands, click Deselect All and reselect the desired
items.
When you have selected the desired commands, click
OK. The commands will be listed numerically in the
Command list field.
Step 10 If you selected All equipments in step 7, you can:
View all commands for all equipment types (go to step
11), or
View selected commands for all equipment of a specific
type (go to step 17).
Step 11 To view all commands for all equipment types, in the Log
Review window, select All equipments in the
Equipment field and All commands in the Command
list field.
Skip to step 15 to continue.

7-15

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 12 To view selected commands for all equipment of a specific


type, in the Log Review window, select All equipments
in the Equipment field.
Step 13 Double-click on the Command list field. An Equipment
Type Selection for Review window will appear:

7-16

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 14 Highlight the equipment you want to view commands for


and click Ok. The equipment command selection
window will appear:

All commands are selected as default. To select certain


commands, click Deselect All and reselect the desired
items.
When you have selected the desired commands, click
OK. The commands will be listed numerically in the
Command list field.
Step 15 In the Log Review window, enter the amount of playback
delay (in seconds) between each command. For example, if
you would like a five-second pause between each
command, enter 5 in the Time Between Display field.
To play back responses manually (one at a time), enter -1
in the Time Between Display field.
Step 16 FarScan Log Review will automatically enter the logs
beginning and ending date and time. To view a specific
portion of the log file, enter a date and time in the Begin
and End fields.

7-17

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Step 17 Click Setup in the Log Review window. The Log


Display Advanced Options window will appear:

Step 18 Select the type of activity you would like to review. (A


checkmark appears in the box next to a selected activity.)
Your choices are AutoPoll, SelectPoll, Manual Command,
Dual Port, Errors and Comments.
Step 19 Choose the log review display format. Following is a
description of each format:
Mini Status Display:

Type of command (AutoPoll, SelectPoll or Manual)


Time and date command was sent
Equipment number and name
Command number and name
Equipment type
Alarm responses

ONE Line Display:

Type of command (AutoPoll, SelectPoll or Manual)


Time and date command was sent
Equipment number and name
Command number and name

Full Status Display:

7-18

Type of command (AutoPoll, SelectPoll or Manual)


Time and date command was sent
Equipment number and name
Command number and name
Equipment type
All equipment responses (alarm and normal)

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 20 Select the report type.


Change of Status - only displays changes in system status
All Activity - displays all activity
Step 21 When you have set up the log file viewing parameters,
click OK.
Step 22 Click Start. The log file data will appear in the right-hand
portion of the log review window.
If you entered -1 in the Time Delay field (step 15),
click Next to advance through the responses.

TE
O

After all the selected responses have been displayed, you can scroll
through them by using the scrollbars at the bottom and right sides of
the display window.
Click Stop to stop the log review process.
Click Pause to temporarily halt the process. (The Pause
button will change to Continue.)

7-19

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Saving to a Floppy Disk


FarScan Log Review allows you to save the log file to a floppy disk
for backup or for reviewing on another FarScan computer. To use this
feature, do the following:

7-20

Step 1

From the main menu, select Operation and Log File


Transfer. The Log File Transfer window will appear:

Step 2

Click Source File. The Open window will appear:

Step 3

Select the source log file (this is the file to be transferred)


and click OK.

Step 4

Insert a floppy disk in the computers disk drive.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 5

Click Target File. A Save As window will appear:

Step 6

Select the a: drive from the pull-down menu under


Drives.

Step 7

In the File name field, type the new file name (such as
JUNE.LOG). Click OK.

Step 8

If you would like to view a summary of the log contents,


click Index. This will create a Windows Notebook file
listing the primary log file information. A window similar
to the following will appear:

To save the file (which is separate from the log file), click
File in the Notepad window menu and select Save, or
select Save As to enter a different file name. The index
will be saved as a text (*.txt) file.
Step 9

Click Start to transfer the file. When the message, File


transfer finished successful appears, click OK and
Close. The log file has been transferred to the location
you selected.

7-21

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Reviewing a
Text Log File

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

The Text Log mode saves the equipment activity data in a format that
can be imported into virtually any word processing or spreadsheet
program. The fields of data are separated by commas (delimited
format).
The instructions in this manual describe how to import the data into
Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Word. If you are using a different word
processing or spreadsheet program, refer to the manuals for those
products for instructions on importing databases.

TE
O

You can open up a Text Log file in Windows Write (located in the
Accessories folder), but the data will not be formatted neatly.

Using Microsoft Word 6.0


To import a Text Log file into Microsoft Word, do the following:
Step 1

Open Microsoft Word.

Step 2

Select Insert and Database from the main menu.

Step 3

Select Get the data source.

Step 4

Change to the directory where the log file is located,


highlight the file and click OK.

Step 5

Select the comma character as the field delimiter. Click


OK.

TE
O

You may receive a series of Record x contained too few data fields
messages. Press the Enter key to accept each message.

7-22

Step 6

The data will be imported in a table format. You will need


to change the formatting of the text and table somewhat.

Step 7

Select File and Save As to give the file a new name and
save it in Microsoft Word format.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Using Microsoft Excel 5.0


Step 1

Start Microsoft Excel.

Step 2

Select File and Open from the main menu.

Step 3

Go to the directory where the Text Log file is located and


select the file name.

Step 4

Select Text Files (*.prn;*.txt;*.csv) and click OK.

Step 5

Select Delimited and click Next.

Step 6

Select Comma delimiters. The data preview will show


you how the data will be formatted. Click Next.

Step 7

In the window that appears, click Next.

Step 8

In the next window, click Finish. The data will be


imported. Format it as necessary.

Step 9

Select File and Save As to give the file a new name and
save it in Microsoft Excel format.

7-23

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Disabling a Log
File

In order to access a Disk Log or Text Log, or stop Print Log, the log
mode must be disabled. To disable the logging, do the following:
Step 1

From the FarScan main menu, select Configuration and


Log Mode, or
Click

Step 2

Next to the enabled log mode, click Disable to disable it.


Click Ok. The green LED will turn blue (inactive).

TE
NO

Disable any active log files before exiting FarScan.

7-24

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Viewing a
Summary
Display

FarScan for Windows

With Summary Display, you can see the status of the entire network.
This feature works in conjunction with AutoPoll, SelectPoll, manual
command execution and log review. To bring up Summary Display,
do the following:
Step 1

Press F3 or click
. You can repeat this step to toggle
Summary Display on and off. A window similar to the
following will appear:

TE
O

If there are new alarms, a general alarm icon will appear in the
upper left corner of the Summary Display window. It represents the
highest priority event that occurred since alarms were last
acknowledged. The event priorities are, from highest to lowest: no
response, new alarm and gone alarm.
Step 2

To view the alarms, click the equipment number. A


Trouble Ticket will appear for that equipment.
To copy a message to the Windows clipboard, right-click
on it with the mouse (or press Ctrl and right click to copy
all messages). You can now paste the message(s) into
another application, such as Windows Notepad.

7-25

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Step 3

New and gone alarms will flash until they are


acknowledged. Acknowledge the alarms by either clicking
Alarm ACK in the Trouble Ticket window, or from the
Summary Display menu, select Commands and Alarm
ACK. An Alarm Acknowledge window will appear:

Step 4

Enter the equipment address and click OK.

TE
O

To acknowledge all alarms at once, press Shift+F6.


When an equipment alarm is acknowledged, it will stop flashing, but
the icon will remain. If a flashing gone alarm is acknowledged, it
will disappear.

Clearing Alarms
Step 1

7-26

To clear a Summary Display window, press Ctrl+F3 or,


from the Summary Display menu, select Commands and
Clear. The following window will appear:

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 2

FarScan for Windows

To clear all alarms, make sure All Alarms is selected and


click OK.
To clear individual alarms, deselect All Alarms. The
following window will appear:

Deselect the alarm types that you want to retain. (An item
is selected when a checkmark appears in the box next to it.)
For example, to retain manual command alarms and clear
all other alarms, deselect Manual Command. Click
OK.

7-27

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Using Trouble
Tickets

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Trouble tickets are a valuable feature of the normal or condensed


Summary Display that allow you to view detailed alarm information.
When alarms are reported by AutoPoll or SelectPoll, you can view a
trouble ticket for individual responses, or view all alarms for a
specific equipment.
The information that appears in a trouble ticket window is as follows:
Command number and description
Equipment information (address, name and type)
Alarm description(s)
Polling type
A - AutoPoll
S - SelectPoll
M - Manual Command
RA - Remote AutoPoll
RS - Remote SelectPoll
RM - Remote Manual Command
Date and time the alarm was identified
The strings of information appear in different colors depending on the
type of alarm. These colors can be changed (see Changing Colors
on page 7-35).

Viewing a Trouble Ticket


To view a trouble ticket for a command response, click on the
response (far left column).
To view a trouble ticket for a specific equipment, click on the
equipment number (top column).
TE
NO

In the condensed Summary Display, you can only view trouble tickets
for selected equipment, not individual responses.

7-28

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Printing a Trouble Ticket


To print an open trouble ticket, make sure a printer is connected to the
computer and click the Print button.

Acknowledging Trouble Ticket Alarms


To acknowledge alarms displayed in an open trouble ticket, click
Alarm ACK. The alarms will be acknowledged.
You can view trouble tickets for acknowledged alarms as well.

7-29

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Customizing
Summary
Display

Selecting Activity to Review


You can specify the type of activity to review in Summary Display by
doing the following:
Step 1

7-30

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Press F3 or click
. You can repeat this step to toggle
Summary Display on and off. The Summary Display
window will appear:

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 2

From the Summary Display menu, select Configuration.


The popup menu will provide several choices:

Step 3

Enabled items have a checkmark next to them.


This menu also allows you to change the following:
Audible alarm (see page 7-32)
Alarm symbols (see page 7-33)
Colors (see page 7-35)

7-31

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Changing the Audible Alarm


When the audible alarm function is enabled, the FarScan computer
will sound a beep each time an alarm or change in system state is
encountered.
If your computer is equipped with a sound card, you can use .WAV
files instead of the default beep.
To turn audible alarms on and off, press Ctrl+F6.
To customize the pitch of the alarms, do the following:
Step 1

From either the main menu or Summary Display menu,


select Configuration and Audible Alarm. The
following window will appear:

Step 2

To change the pitch of an alarm, drag the button on the


frequency scroll bar left or right. Click Test to hear the
new sound.
If you want to use .WAV files, copy the desired files into
the FarScan for Windows directory. In the Audible Alarm
Options window, you can select the sound file.

Step 3

After you make the necessary changes, click OK.

TE
NO

If your computer does not have a sound card installed, or if one is


installed, but no .WAV files are selected, the default will be a beep.

7-32

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Changing Symbols
You can custom-design symbols for FarScans Summary View
feature using Windows Paintbrush. The symbols can be changed
while FarScan is running.
To create symbols, do the following:
Step 1

Open Windows Paintbrush. (The program is in the


Accessories folder.)

Step 2

From the Paintbrush menu, select File and Open.


Change to the FarScan directory.

Step 3

Three default icon files will appear: ap.bmp, mc.bmp and


sp.bmp. Select one of them and click OK. The icon will
appear in Paintbrush.

Step 4

Select File and Save As from the menu. Type in a new


file name and save it as a 16 color bitmap (.bmp) file in the
FarScan directory. Click OK.

Step 5

Select View and Zoom In from the menu. Click on the


FarScan image. It will enlarge into a 15x15 pixel image.

Step 6

Use the Paintbrush tools to edit the image.

Step 7

When you have finished designing the icon, select File


and Save from the menu. Click OK. The new file
should be saved in the FarScan directory.

Step 8

Repeat steps 2 through 7 to create additional symbols. (You


can create up to 13.)

Step 9

Exit Paintbrush and start FarScan.

Step 10 Click

. The Summary Display window will appear.

7-33

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 11 Select Configuration and Alarm Symbols from the


Summary Display menu. The Summary Display - Alarm
Options window will appear:

Step 12 Click the popup list next to the icon(s) you want to change
and select the new icon file name. To apply the changes,
click Apply or OK.
After the new symbols have been applied, they will appear every time
Summary View is enabled.

7-34

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Changing Colors
It is possible to change the colors of the Summary Displays
background, trouble ticket messages and one-line reports. To change
the colors, do the following:
Step 1

Click

Step 2

Select Configuration and Colors from the Summary


Display menu. The following window will appear:

Step 3

Click the down arrow next to each color to display the


colors available. Select the desired color.

to open the Summary Display window.

TE
NO

To return to the default settings, click Default.


Step 4

When you have finished making changes, click OK to


save them and return to the Summary Display window.

7-35

Chapter 7: Equipment Activity

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank

7-36

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

CHAPTER 8

Manual Commands

Chapter
Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Sending a Manual Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Explains how to send a manual command to a target equipment.

Command Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5


Describes FarScans command tables and equipment
designations.

Manual Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8


Lists the following command sets:
1DM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
2DM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
3DM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
1URB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
2URB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
1URB_1DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
1URB_2DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
2URB_1DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
CAU or DVA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
DVL_44 or DVT_44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
DVM_45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
DVM_8T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
DVM_DS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
DVT_8 or DVT_12 or DV12/16T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
DVT_16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
GSTAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
GSTAR_ME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
MEGASTAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
mSTAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
mSTAR_P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47

8-1

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

QLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Qlink_II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
SDH_1:N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Aurora58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Constell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Introduction

FarScan for Windows

Manual commands allow remote manual control of the network


protection/diagnostic system. With manual control, you can monitor
the status of and control transfers of traffic at the target equipment.
Functions available through the display/keypad device of certain
radios have been integrated into FarScans manual command menu.
Manual commands are performed one at a time on a specified target
equipment.

!
The incorrect handling of these commands can severely affect the
operation of FarScan and your equipment. Consult your System
Manager before using the commands.

Sending a
Manual
Command

Step 1

Turn the system connection online. (See page 4-10.)

Step 2

If necessary, load the correct database, equipment file and


poll file. (See page 6-3.)

Step 3

Click
, type Alt+M or select Operation and
Manual Command from the main menu. The Manual
Command window will appear:

Step 4

If necessary, change the Master Equipment Number. (Click


on the Num field and change the number.)

8-3

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 5

Select the equipment number to send the commands to by


typing the number in the Target Equipment Number field
or selecting an item from the popup list.

Step 6

Enter the command number in the Number field or select


a command from the popup list.

Step 7

Click Inquiry or Alter Setting to send the command.


The equipment response will display in the Commands/
Responses window.

TE
NO

If you select Alter Setting, a secondary window may appear


containing more specific information. Select the appropriate details
and send the command.

Copying Individual Manual Command Responses


FarScan allows you to copy individual manual commands and
responses to the Microsoft Windows clipboard. When they are copied
to the clipboard, they may be pasted into the body of an e-mail or into
a text-editing program such as Microsoft Notepad.
Step 1

To copy a line of manual command information, click on


the desired command or response line in the response
portion of the Manual Command window.
To select multiple lines, click on the first line to highlight it,
hold down the Shift key and click on the last line to be
selected.

8-4

Step 2

When the desired information has been highlighted, press


Ctrl+c. This will copy the data to the Windows clipboard.

Step 3

Open the application to paste the text into and press Ctrl+v.
The text will be copied from the clipboard and pasted into
the application.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Command
Information

FarScan for Windows

The command tables in this section (beginning on page 8-8) are


organized by equipment type, and list available SelectPoll and
manual commands for Harris equipment.
Each command table lists the command number, designation and user
access level for that equipment type.
The FarScan designation for Harris equipment is provided in the
following FarScan Equipment Designations table. Access levels are
defined in Chapter 5, User Information.
TE
NO

Commands 920 through 929 are used to control and monitor the
Digital VersaT1lity Bridge (DVB). The DVB is used to configure
your network for multiple FarScan pollers.

8-5

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan Equipment Designations


FarScan
Designation

8-6

Equipment

1DM
2DM
3DM

DM2-12, DVM2-12, DM2-25, DM6-4A-45, DM6-4A-90,


DM8-4A-45, DM8-4A-90, DM11-4A-45, and DM11-4A-90
Digital Microwave radio.

1URB

Single Terminal Urbanet 2/7/10/10e/18z digital radio with DVT


4 mux and DVS service channel, equipped with DVA.

2URB

Dual Terminal Urbanet 2/7/10/10e/18z digital radio with DVT 4


multiplexer and DVS service channel, equipped with DVA.

1URB_1DM
1URB_2DM
2URB_1DM

Urbanet and DM radios.

CAU

Control Alarm Unit.

DVA

DVA Digital VersaT1lity Alarm interface.

DVL_44

DVL 44 Digital VersaT1lity Lightwave multiplexer.

DVM_45

DVM2-45/DVM6-45 and DVM18-45 Digital VersaT1lity


radios.

DVM_8T

DVM18-8T and DVM23-8T Digital VersaT1lity radios.

DVM_DS3

DVM2-45/DVM6-45 radio, with DS3 interface.

DV12/16T
DVT_12

DVM6-12T/DVM10-12T/16T Digital VersaT1lity radios.

DVT_8

DVM2-8T/DVM6-8T/DVM10-8T Digital VersaT1lity radios.

DVT_16

DVT 16 Digital VersaT1lity Transmission multiplexer.

DVT_44

DVT 44 Digital VersaT1lity Transmission multiplexer.

GSTAR

GlobeStar radios in the 13-, 15-, and 18-GHz bands for all
capacities, including DS3.

GSTAR_ME

GlobeStar medium capacity radios.

MEGASTAR

MegaStar radios.

mSTAR

mSTAR contains the following equipment:


MicroStar 38 FSK
MicroStar 13/15/18/23 up to 8 E1/T1
MicroStar 38 Plus 1/2/4 E1

mSTAR_P

mSTAR_P (protected) contains the following equipment:


MicroStar 13/15/18/23, 16 E1
MicroStar 38 Plus 8/16 E1

QLINK

Quadralink radios in the 2- and 7-GHz bands, with or without


1:N protection.

Qlink_II

Quadralink radios in the 7- to 8-MHz bands, with MHSB, FD,


MHSB/SD, and HD protection modes.

SDH_1:N

MegaStar radios with 1:N protection, N = 1 to 7 protection.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

FarScan
Designation

Equipment

Aurora58

Aurora 5800

Constell

Constellation

8-7

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

Manual
Commands

8-8

1DM
No.

1DM Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

004

External Alarm & Control

009

DVA Monitor/Control Config.

010

FARSCAN System Code

011

Global System Monitor

012

Option Setting

027

BER Alarm Status, East

145

Tx/Rx On Line Status, East

148

Tx/Rx Alarm Status, East

151

Input Alarm Status, East

174

AGC Rx A Monitor, East

175

AGC Rx B Monitor, East

236

DVS/Manual OVRD Status, East

247

DS3/External Alarm Status, East

260

Tx Low Power Alarm Status, East

540

Radio Tx/Rx Release Lock

545

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, East

801

Group 1, A&B Active Input Status

802

Group 1, C&D Active Input Status

803

Group 2, A&B Active Input Status

804

Group 2, C&D Active Input Status

812

Report Alarmed Analog Status

817

Analog Limit Values

818

Programmable Alarm Ind. Status

821

Group 1, Relays Status/Control

822

Group 2, Relays Status/Control

825

Global Activate Relay Control1

830

Group 1, Analog C1+, D1- Value

831

Group 1, Analog C2+, D2- Value

832

Group 1, Analog C3+, D3- Value

833

Group 1, Analog C4+, D4- Value

834

Group 1, Analog C5+, D5- Value

835

Group 1, Analog C6+, D6- Value

836

Group 1, Analog C7+, D7- Value

837

Group 1, Analog C8+, D8- Value

838

Group 2, Analog C1+, D1- Value

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

No.

FarScan for Windows

1DM Command

Level

839

Group 2, Analog C2+, D2- Value

840

Group 2, Analog C3+, D3- Value

841

Group 2, Analog C4+, D4- Value

842

Group 2, Analog C5+, D5- Value

843

Group 2, Analog C6+, D6- Value

844

Group 2, Analog C7+, D7- Value

845

Group 2, Analog C8+, D8- Value

866

Grp 1, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

867

Grp 1, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

876

Grp 2, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

877

Grp 2, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

890

DVA Equipment Reset

Command 825 must be sent twice and AutoPoll must be turned OFF if the
Master site is non-DVA.

8-9

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

2DM
No.

8-10

2DM Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

004

External Alarm & Control

009

DVA Monitor/Control Config.

010

FARSCAN System Code

011

Global System Monitor

012

Option Setting

027

BER Alarm Status, East

028

BER Alarm Status, West

145

Tx/Rx On Line Status, East

146

Tx/Rx On Line Status, West

148

Tx/Rx Alarm Status, East

149

Tx/Rx Alarm Status, West

151

Input Alarm Status, East

152

Input Alarm Status, West

174

AGC Rx A Monitor, East

175

AGC Rx B Monitor, East

176

AGC Rx A Monitor, West

177

AGC Rx B Monitor, West

236

DVS/Manual OVRD Status, East

237

DVS/Manual OVRD Status, West

247

DS3/External Alarm Status, East

248

DS3/External Alarm Status, West

260

Tx Low Power Alarm Status, East

261

Tx Low Power Alarm Status, West

540

Radio Tx/Rx Release Lock

545

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, East

546

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, West

801

Group 1, A&B Active Input Status

802

Group 1, C&D Active Input Status

812

Report Alarmed Analog Status

817

Analog Limit Values

818

Programmable Alarm Ind. Status

821

Group 1, Relays Status/Control

825

Global Activate Relay Control1

830

Group 1, Analog C1+, D1- Value

831

Group 1, Analog C2+, D2- Value

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

No.

FarScan for Windows

2DM Command

Level

832

Group 1, Analog C3+, D3- Value

833

Group 1, Analog C4+, D4- Value

834

Group 1, Analog C5+, D5- Value

835

Group 1, Analog C6+, D6- Value

836

Group 1, Analog C7+, D7- Value

837

Group 1, Analog C8+, D8- Value

866

Grp 1, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

867

Grp 1, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

876

Grp 2, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

877

Grp 2, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

890

DVA Equipment Reset

Command 825 must be sent twice and AutoPoll must be turned OFF if the
Master site is non-DVA.

8-11

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

3DM
No.

8-12

3DM Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

004

External Alarm & Control

009

DVA Monitor/Control Config.

010

FARSCAN System Code

011

Global System Monitor

012

Option Setting

027

BER Alarm Status, East

028

BER Alarm Status, West

029

BER Alarm Status, Xpnd

145

Tx/Rx On Line Status, East

146

Tx/Rx On Line Status, West

147

Tx/Rx On Line Status, Xpnd

148

Tx/Rx Alarm Status, East

149

Tx/Rx Alarm Status, West

150

Tx/Rx Alarm Status, Xpnd

151

Input Alarm Status, East

152

Input Alarm Status, West

153

Input Alarm Status, Xpnd

174

AGC Rx A Monitor, East

175

AGC Rx B Monitor, East

176

AGC Rx A Monitor, West

177

AGC Rx B Monitor, West

178

AGC Rx A Monitor, Xpnd

179

AGC Rx B Monitor, Xpnd

236

DVS/Manual OVRD Status, East

237

DVS/Manual OVRD Status, West

238

DVS/Manual OVRD Status, Xpnd

247

DS3/External Alarm Status, East

248

DS3/External Alarm Status, West

249

DS3/External Alarm Status, Xpnd

260

Tx Low Power Alarm Status, East

261

Tx Low Power Alarm Status, West

262

Tx Low Power Alarm Status, Xpnd

540

Radio Tx/Rx Release Lock

545

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, East

546

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, West

547

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, Xpnd

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

No.
818

FarScan for Windows

3DM Command

Level

Programmable Alarm Ind. Status

825

Global Activate Relay

866

Grp 1, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

867

Grp 1, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

876

Grp 2, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

877

Grp 2, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

890

DVA Equipment Reset

Control1

Command 825 must be sent twice and AutoPoll must be turned OFF if the
Master site is non-DVA.

8-13

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

1URB
No.

8-14

1URB Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

004

External Alarm & Control

009

DVA Monitor/Control Config.

010

FARSCAN System Code

011

Global System Monitor

012

Option Setting

141

Radio Status, East

174

AGC Rx A Monitor, East

175

AGC Rx B Monitor, East

231

DVT4/DVS/Manual OVRD Status, East

241

DS1 Loopback Status, East

243

DVT4 Remote Select Status, East

522

Transfer DVT4 Traffic, East

526

Remote DS1 Loopback, East

529

Clear Latched Line Out Alarm, East

541

Radio Tx/Rx Release Lock

545

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, East

801

Group 1, A&B Active Input Status

802

Group 1, C&D Active Input Status

803

Group 2, A&B Active Input Status

804

Group 2, C&D Active Input Status

812

Report Alarmed Analog Status

817

Analog Limit Values

818

Programmable Alarm Ind. Status

821

Group 1, Relays Status/Control

822

Group 2, Relays Status/Control

825

Global Activate Relay

Control1

830

Group 1, Analog C1+, D1- Value

831

Group 1, Analog C2+, D2- Value

832

Group 1, Analog C3+, D3- Value

833

Group 1, Analog C4+, D4- Value

834

Group 1, Analog C5+, D5- Value

835

Group 1, Analog C6+, D6- Value

836

Group 1, Analog C7+, D7- Value

837

Group 1, Analog C8+, D8- Value

838

Group 2, Analog C1+, D1- Value

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

No.

FarScan for Windows

1URB Command

Level

839

Group 2, Analog C2+, D2- Value

840

Group 2, Analog C3+, D3- Value

841

Group 2, Analog C4+, D4- Value

842

Group 2, Analog C5+, D5- Value

843

Group 2, Analog C6+, D6- Value

844

Group 2, Analog C7+, D7- Value

845

Group 2, Analog C8+, D8- Value

866

Grp 1, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

867

Grp 1, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

876

Grp 2, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

877

Grp 2, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

890

DVA Equipment Reset

Command 825 must be sent twice and AutoPoll must be turned OFF if the
Master site is non-DVA.

8-15

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

2URB
No.

8-16

2URB Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

004

External Alarm & Control

009

DVA Monitor/Control Config.

010

FARSCAN System Code

011

Global System Monitor

012

Option Setting

141

Radio Status, East

142

Radio Status. West

174

AGC Rx A Monitor, East

175

AGC Rx B Monitor, East

176

AGC Rx A Monitor, West

177

AGC Rx B Monitor, West

231

DVT4/DVS/Manual OVRD Status, East

232

DVT4/DVS/Manual OVRD Status, West

241

DS1 Loopback Status, East

242

DS1 Loopback Status, West

243

DVT4 Remote Select Status, East

244

DVT4 Remote Select Status, West

522

Transfer DVT4 Traffic, East

523

Transfer DVT4 Traffic, West

526

Remote DS1 Loopback, East

527

Remote DS1 Loopback, West

529

Clear Latched Line Out Alarm, East

530

Clear Latched Line Out Alarm, West

541

Radio Tx/Rx Release Lock

545

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, East

546

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, West

801

Group 1, A&B Active Input Status

802

Group 1, C&D Active Input Status

812

Report Alarmed Analog Status

817

Analog Limit Values

818

Programmable Alarm Ind. Status

821

Group 1, Relays Status/Control

825

Global Activate Relay Control1

830

Group 1, Analog C1+, D1- Value

831

Group 1, Analog C2+, D2- Value

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

No.

FarScan for Windows

2URB Command

Level

832

Group 1, Analog C3+, D3- Value

833

Group 1, Analog C4+, D4- Value

834

Group 1, Analog C5+, D5- Value

835

Group 1, Analog C6+, D6- Value

836

Group 1, Analog C7+, D7- Value

837

Group 1, Analog C8+, D8- Value

866

Grp 1, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

867

Grp 1, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

876

Grp 2, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

877

Grp 2, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

890

DVA Equipment Reset

Command 825 must be sent twice and AutoPoll must be turned OFF if the
Master site is non-DVA.

8-17

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

1URB_1DM
No.

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

004

External Alarm & Control

009

DVA Monitor/Control Config.

010

FARSCAN System Code

011

Global System Monitor

012

Option Setting

028

BER Alarm Status, West

141

Radio Status, East

146

Tx/Rx On Line Status, West

149

Tx/Rx Alarm Status, West

152

Input Alarm Status, West

174

AGC Rx A Monitor, East 1

175

East 1

AGC Rx B Monitor,

176

AGC Rx A Monitor, West

177

AGC Rx B Monitor, West 1

231

DVT4/DVS/Manual OVRD Status, East

237

DVS/Manual OVRD Status, West

241

DS1 Loopback Status, East

243

DVT4 Remote Select Status, East

248

DS3/External Alarm Status, West

261

Tx Low Power Alarm Status, West

522

Transfer DVT4 Traffic, East

526

Remote DS1 Loopback, East

529

Clear Latched Line Out Alarm, East

540

DMx Radio Tx/Rx Release Lock

Radio Tx/Rx Release Lock

545

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, East

546

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, West 1

801

Group 1, A&B Active Input Status

802

Group 1, C&D Active Input Status

812

Report Alarmed Analog Status

817

Analog Limit Values

818

Programmable Alarm Ind. Status

821

Group 1, Relays Status/Control

541

8-18

1URB_1DM Command

825

Global Activate Relay Control

830

Group 1, Analog C1+, D1- Value

5
4

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

No.

1
2

FarScan for Windows

1URB_1DM Command

Level

831

Group 1, Analog C2+, D2- Value

832

Group 1, Analog C3+, D3- Value

833

Group 1, Analog C4+, D4- Value

834

Group 1, Analog C5+, D5- Value

835

Group 1, Analog C6+, D6- Value

836

Group 1, Analog C7+, D7- Value

837

Group 1, Analog C8+, D8- Value

866

Grp 1, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

867

Grp 1, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

876

Grp 2, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

877

Grp 2, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

890

DVA Equipment Reset

Not available for Urbanet 18 radios.


Command 825 must be sent twice and AutoPoll must be turned OFF if the
Master site is non-DVA.

8-19

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

1URB_2DM
No.

8-20

1URB_2DM Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

004

External Alarm & Control

009

DVA Monitor/Control Config.

010

FARSCAN System Code

011

Global System Monitor

012

Option Setting

028

BER Alarm Status, West

029

BER Alarm Status, Xpnd

141

Radio Status, East

146

Tx/Rx On Line Status, West

147

Tx/Rx On Line Status, Xpnd

149

Tx/Rx Alarm Status, West

150

Tx/Rx Alarm Status, Xpnd

152

Input Alarm Status, West

153

Input Alarm Status, Xpnd

174

AGC Rx A Monitor, East 1

175

East 1

AGC Rx B Monitor,

176

AGC Rx A Monitor, West

177

AGC Rx B Monitor, West 1

178

AGC Rx A Monitor, Xpnd

179

AGC Rx B Monitor, Xpnd

231

DVT4/DVS/Manual OVRD Status, East

237

DVS/Manual OVRD Status, West

238

DVS/Manual OVRD Status, Xpnd

241

DS1 Loopback Status, East

243

DVT4 Remote Select Status, East

248

DS3/External Alarm Status, West

249

DS3/External Alarm Status, Xpnd

261

Tx Low Power Alarm Status, West

262

Tx Low Power Alarm Status, Xpnd

522

Transfer DVT4 Traffic, East

526

Remote DS1 Loopback, East

529

Clear Latched Line Out Alarm, East

540

DMx Radio Tx/Rx Release Lock

541

Radio Tx/Rx Release Lock

545

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, East

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

No.

1
2

FarScan for Windows

1URB_2DM Command

Level

546

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, West

547

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, Xpnd

818

Programmable Alarm Ind. Status

825

Global Activate Relay Control

866

Grp 1, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

867

Grp 1, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

876

Grp 2, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

877

Grp 2, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

890

DVA Equipment Reset

Not available for Urbanet 18 radios.


Command 825 must be sent twice and AutoPoll must be turned OFF if the
Master site is non-DVA.

8-21

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

2URB_1DM
No.

Level

001

Global Status

004

External Alarm & Control

009

DVA Monitor/Control Config.

010

FARSCAN System Code

011

Global System Monitor

012

Option Setting

029

BER Alarm Status, Xpnd

141

Radio Status, East

142

Radio Status, West

147

Tx/Rx On Line Status, Xpnd

150

Tx/Rx Alarm Status, Xpnd

153

Input Alarm Status, Xpnd

174

East 1

AGC Rx A Monitor, East

175

AGC Rx B Monitor,

176

AGC Rx A Monitor, West 1

177

AGC Rx B Monitor,

West 1

178

AGC Rx A Monitor, Xpnd

179

AGC Rx B Monitor, Xpnd

231

DVT4/DVS/Manual OVRD Status, East

232

DVT4/DVS/Manual OVRD Status, West

238

DVS/Manual OVRD Status, Xpnd

241

DS1 Loopback Status, East

242

DS1 Loopback Status, West

243

DVT4 Remote Select Status, East

244

DVT4 Remote Select Status, West

249

DS3/External Alarm Status, Xpnd

3
3

262

Tx Low Power Alarm Status, Xpnd

522

Transfer DVT4 Traffic, East

523

Transfer DVT4 Traffic, West

526

Remote DS1 Loopback, East

527

Remote DS1 Loopback, West

529

Clear Latched Line Out Alarm, East

530

Clear Latched Line Out Alarm, West

540

Radio Tx/Rx Release Lock

541

Radio Tx/Rx Release Lock

545

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, East 1

546

8-22

2URB_1DM Command

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, West

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

No.

1
2

FarScan for Windows

2URB_1DM Command

Level

547

Radio Tx/Rx Transfer, Xpnd

818

Programmable Alarm Ind. Status

825

Global Activate Relay Control 2

866

Grp 1, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

867

Grp 1, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

876

Grp 2, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

877

Grp 2, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

890

DVA Equipment Reset

Not available for Urbanet 18 radios.


Command 825 must be sent twice and AutoPoll must be turned OFF if the
Master site is non-DVA.

8-23

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

CAU or DVA
No.

8-24

CAU or DVA Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

004

External Alarm & Control

009

DVA Monitor/Control Config.

010

FARSCAN System Code

011

Global System Monitor

012

Option Setting

801

Group 1, A&B Active Input Status

802

Group 1, C&D Active Input Status

803

Group 2, A&B Active Input Status

804

Group 2, C&D Active Input Status

805

Group 3, A&B Active Input Status

806

Group 3, C&D Active Input Status

812

Report Alarmed Analog Status

816

Analog Input Value

817

Analog Limit Values

818

Programmable Alarm Ind. Status

821

Group 1, Relays Status/Control

822

Group 2, Relays Status/Control

823

Group 3, Relays Status/Control

825

Global Activate Relay Control

830

Group 1, Analog C1+, D1- Value

831

Group 1, Analog C2+, D2- Value

832

Group 1, Analog C3+, D3- Value

833

Group 1, Analog C4+, D4- Value

834

Group 1, Analog C5+, D5- Value

835

Group 1, Analog C6+, D6- Value

836

Group 1, Analog C7+, D7- Value

837

Group 1, Analog C8+, D8- Value

838

Group 2, Analog C1+, D1- Value

839

Group 2, Analog C2+, D2- Value

840

Group 2, Analog C3+, D3- Value

841

Group 2, Analog C4+, D4- Value

842

Group 2, Analog C5+, D5- Value

843

Group 2, Analog C6+, D6- Value

844

Group 2, Analog C7+, D7- Value

845

Group 2, Analog C8+, D8- Value

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

No.

FarScan for Windows

CAU or DVA Command

Level

846

Group 3, Analog C1+, D1- Value

847

Group 3, Analog C2+, D2- Value

848

Group 3, Analog C3+, D3- Value

849

Group 3, Analog C4+, D4- Value

850

Group 3, Analog C5+, D5- Value

851

Group 3, Analog C6+, D6- Value

852

Group 3, Analog C7+, D7- Value

853

Group 3, Analog C8+, D8- Value

866

Grp 1, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

867

Grp 1, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

876

Grp 2, C7/D7 Custom Analog Value

877

Grp 2, C8/D8 Custom Analog Value

890

DVA Equipment Reset

920

Comm. 1, Ext A Port Status

921

Comm. 2, Ext B Port Status

922

Comm. 3, INT CNTL Port Status

925

FARSCAN Remote Port Status

927

Set Bridge Port Default

929

Set Bridge Port Mask

Command 825 must be sent twice and AutoPoll must be turned OFF if the
Master site is non-DVA.

8-25

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

Constell
No.

8-26

Constell Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

003

MUX Unit Status

004

External Alarm Status

005

System Control Status

006

Common Equipment Status

007

Software Version

008

Display Equipment Address

015

Modem Equipment Status

016

Radio Equipment Status

017

EXT Relay Status & Control

018

System Protection

130

System On Line Status

141

Radio Tx/Rx A1 Status

142

Radio Tx/Rx A2 Status

145

Tx/Rx Frequency Status

146

Tx A1/A2 Power Level

148

Rx A1/A2 Signal Level

151

Modem A1 Status

152

Modem A2 Status

156

System Locked Status

159

Tx/Rx Traffic Status

160

Tributary Status

161

DS1 A1-A4 Tributary Status

162

DS1 A5-A8 Tributary Status

163

DS1 A9-A12 Tributary Status

164

DS1 A13-A16 Tributary Status

165

DS1 A7-A20 Tributary Status

166

DS1 A21-A24 Tributary Status

167

DS1 A25-A28 Tributary Status

168

DS1 REM LPBK A1-A16 Status

169

DS1 REM LPBK A17-A28 Status

170

DS1 LPBK A1-A16 Status

171

DS1 LPBK A17-A28 Status

175

DS1 A1-A16 Configuration

176

DS1 A17-A28 Configuration

182

MUX M12-1 Status

183

MUX M12-2 Status

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

No.

FarScan for Windows

Constell Command

Level

184

MUX M12-3 Status

185

MUX M12-4 Status

186

MUX M12-5 Status

187

MUX M12-6 Status

188

MUX M12-7 Status

189

MUX M12-STBY Status

190

MUX HLM 1 Status

191

MUX HLM 2 Status

251

DS1 A1-A4 Code Status

252

DS1 A5-A8 Code Status

253

DS1 A9-A12 Code Status

254

DS1 A13-A16 Code Status

255

DS1 A17-A20 Code Status

256

DS1 A21-A24 Code Status

257

DS1 A25-A28 Code Status

261

DS1 A1-A4 Equalizer Status

262

DS1 A5-A8 Equalizer Status

263

DS1 A9-A12 Equalizer Status

264

DS1 A13-A16 Equalizer Status

265

DS1 A17-A20 Equalizer Status

266

DS1 A21-A24 Equalizer Status

267

DS1 A25-A28 Equalizer Status

270

Tx Power Mode

276

Capacity/Mode Configuration

295

Communication Port Parameters

296

Service Channel STAT/CTRL

298

Service Channel Address

299

Service CH Configuration

556

System Lock Status/Control

559

DS1 BER Test A1-A28

560

System BER Test STAT/CTRL

561

System BER Status

568

DS1 REM LPBK A1-A16 Control

569

DS1 REM LPBK A17-A28 Control

570

DS1 LPBK A1-A16 Control

571

DS1 LPBK A17-A28 Control

950

Run Alternate Software

8-27

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

DVL_44 or DVT_44
No.

8-28

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

002

MUX System Status

003

MUX Unit Status

004

External Alarm & Control

010

FARSCAN System Code

011

Global System Monitor

022

BER Monitor

023

SET BER Threshold

200

MUX XCVR A Status (OPT/M33)

201

MUX XCVR B Status (OPT/M33)

202

MUX XCVR AS Status (OPT/M33)

203

MUX XCVR BS Status (OPT/M33)

221

M2X A Unit Status

222

M2X B Unit Status

223

M2X STBY Unit Status

230

MUX DC-DC Status

235

Low Speed Switch Status

240

M12/M22 Unit Status

250

DVI System Status

251

DVI Unit Status

255

DVI DROP & ADD Commands

256

DVI E-LEAD Option Select

257

DVI Bypass Enable

511

Drop and Add Commands

521

XFER MUX Traffic to NORMAL

523

XFER MUX Traffic to STBY

524

DS1 Remote LPBK SW OVRD

525

M12 Remote DS1 LOOPBACK

531

SYS UNDO XFER Command

533

SYS Enable PROT Command

591
1

DVL_44 or DVT_44 Command

LEARN System

CONFIG1

When sending command 591, you will receive a No Response or Site


Inquiry message when in fact LEARN has taken place.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

DVM_45
No.

DVM_45 Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

002

MUX System Status

003

MUX Unit Status

004

External Alarm & Control

005

Vent and System Status

010

Farscan System Code

011

Global System Monitor

014

Radio/Modem A Status

015

Radio/Modem B Status

022

BER Monitor

023

Set BER Threshold

024

A1/A2 Parity BER/ERR Count

025

B1/B2 Parity BER/ERR Count

100

Modem Tx Status

110

Modem Rx A1 Status

111

Modem Rx A2 Status

112

Modem Rx B1 Status

113

Modem Rx B2 Status

120

Radio/Modem Com EQ A Status

121

Radio/Modem Com EQ B Status

160

Radio Tx A1 Status

161

Radio Tx A2 Status

162

Radio Tx B1 Status

163

Radio Tx B2 Status

166

Tx Level A Monitor

167

Tx Level B Monitor

170

Radio Rx A1 Status

171

Radio Rx A2 Status

172

Radio Rx B1 Status

173

Radio Rx B2 Status

176

AGC A Rx Monitor

177

AGC B Rx Monitor

200

MUX XCVR A Status

201

MUX XCVR B Status

202

MUX XCVR AS Status

203

MUX XCVR BS Status

220

MUX M2X Status

8-29

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

No.

8-30

DVM_45 Command

Level

230

MUX DC-DC Status

235

Low Speed Switch Status

240

M12/M22 Status

250

DVI System Status

251

DVI Unit Status

255

DVI Drop & Add Commands

256

DVI E-Lead Option Select

257

DVI Bypass Enable

369

Statistical Req. Disable/Enable

371

Statistical Reset Req. Rx A/B

375

Parity ERR Free Seconds, Rx A

376

Parity ERR Free Seconds, Rx B

377

One Parity ERR Second, Rx A

378

One Parity ERR Second, Rx B

379

Severely Parity ERR, Rx A

380

Severely Parity ERR, Rx B

381

Total Parity ERR Count, Rx A

382

Total Parity ERR Count, Rx B

383

Out-of-Frame Indicator, Rx A

384

Out-of-Frame Indicator, Rx B

385

Measurement Duration Counter A

386

Measurement Duration Counter B

511

Drop and Add Commands

521

XFER MUX Traffic to Normal

523

XFER MUX Traffic to STBY

524

DS1 Remote LPBK SW OVRD

525

M12 Unit Remote DS1 LPBK

531

SYS UNDO LOCK/XFER Command

533

SYS Enable PROT Command

541

Radio Tx/Rx Release Lock

543

Radio Tx/Rx Lock On Line

550

Radio A ATPC Status/Command

551

Radio B ATPC Status/Command

553

Radio ATPC Time Hi PWR On

554

Radio ATPC Yearly Duration CTR

593

Download Run Time Code

911

Display Port Baud Rate

912

Restore Port Baud Rate Default

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

No.

FarScan for Windows

DVM_45 Command

Level

913

Set Port Baud Rate

920

Comm. 1, EXT A Port Status

921

Comm. 2, EXT B Port Status

922

Comm. 3, INT CNTL Port Status

925

FARSCAN Remote Port Status

927

Set Bridge Port Default

928

Clear Update Request

929

Set Bridge Port Mask

8-31

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

DVM_8T
No.

8-32

DVM_8T Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

002

MUX System Status

003

MUX Unit Status

004

External Alarm & Control

010

FARSCAN System Code

011

Global System Monitor

014

Radio/Modem A Status

015

Radio/Modem B Status

022

BER Monitor

023

Set BER Threshold

100

Modem Tx Status

110

Modem Rx A1 Status

111

Modem Rx A2 Status

112

Modem Rx B1 Status

113

Modem Rx B2 Status

120

Modem Com EQ A Status

121

Modem Com EQ B Status

160

Radio Tx A1 Status

161

Radio Tx A2 Status

162

Radio Tx B1 Status

163

Radio Tx B2 Status

170

Radio Rx A1 Status

171

Radio Rx A2 Status

172

Radio Rx B1 Status

173

Radio Rx B2 Status

176

AGC A Rx Monitor

177

AGC B Rx Monitor

200

MUX XCVR A Status

201

MUX XCVR B Status

202

MUX XCVR AS Status

203

MUX XCVR BS Status

220

MUX M2X Status

230

MUX DC-DC Status

235

Low Speed Switch Status

240

M12/M22 Status

250

DVI System Status

251

DVI Unit Status

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

No.

FarScan for Windows

DVM_8T Command

Level

255

DVI Drop & Add Commands

256

DVI E-LEAD Option Select

257

DVI Bypass Enable

511

Drop and Add Commands

521

XFER MUX Traffic to Normal

523

XFER MUX Traffic to STBY

524

DS1 Remote LPBK SW OVRD

525

M12 UNIT REMOTE DS1 LPBK

531

SYS UNDO LOCK/XFER Command

533

SYS Enable PROT Command

541

Radio Tx/Rx Release Lock

543

Radio Tx/Rx Lock On Line

8-33

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

DVM_DS3
No.

8-34

DVM_DS3 Command

Level

001

Global Status

002

DS3 INFAC System Status

003

DS3 INFAC Unit Status

004

External Alarm & Control

005

Vent and System Status

010

Farscan System Code

011

Global System Monitor

014

Radio/Modem A Status

015

Radio/Modem B Status

022

BER Monitor

023

Set BER Threshold

100

Modem Tx Status

110

Modem Rx A1 Status

111

Modem Rx A2 Status

112

Modem Rx B1 Status

113

Modem Rx B2 Status

120

Radio/Modem Com EQ A Status

121

Radio/Modem Com EQ B Status

160

Radio Tx A1 Status

161

Radio Tx A2 Status

162

Radio Tx B1 Status

163

Radio Tx B2 Status

166

Tx Level A Monitor

167

Tx Level B Monitor

170

Radio Rx A1 Status

171

Radio Rx A2 Status

172

Radio Rx B1 Status

173

Radio Rx B2 Status

176

AGC A Rx Monitor

177

AGC B Rx Monitor

200

MUX XCVR A1 Status

201

MUX XCVR B1 Status

202

MUX XCVR A2 Status

203

MUX XCVR B2 Status

230

DS3 INFAC DC-DC Status

260

T3 SYNC 1 Unit Status

261

T3 SYNC 2 Unit Status

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

No.

FarScan for Windows

DVM_DS3 Command

Level

522

XFER DS3 INFAC Traffic

531

SYS UNDO LOCK/XFER Command

533

SYS Enable PROT Command

542

Radio Tx Lock/Release

544

Radio Rx Lock/Release

8-35

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

DVT_8 or DVT_12 or DV12/16T


No.

8-36

DVT_8 or DVT_12 or DV12/16T Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

002

MUX System Status

003

MUX Unit Status

004

External Alarm & Control

005

Vent, PA Fan and System Status

010

FARSCAN System Code

011

Global System Monitor

016

Radio/Modem A-B Status

022

BER Monitor

023

Set BER Threshold

160

Radio Tx A1 Status

161

Radio Tx A2 Status

162

Radio Tx B1 Status

163

Radio Tx B2 Status

170

Radio Rx A1 Status

171

Radio Rx A2 Status

172

Radio Rx B1 Status

173

Radio Rx B2 Status

200

MUX XCVR A Status

201

MUX XCVR B Status

202

MUX XCVR AS Status

203

MUX XCVR BS Status

220

MUX M2X Status

230

MUX DC-DC Status

235

Low Speed Switch Status

240

M12/M22 Status

250

DVI System Status

251

DVI Unit Status

255

DVI Drop & Add Commands

256

DVI E-LEAD Option Select

257

DVI Bypass Enable

511

Drop and Add Commands

521

XFER MUX Traffic to Normal

523

XFER MUX Traffic to STBY

524

DS1 Remote LPBK SW OVRD

525

M12 Unit Remote DS1 LPBK

531

SYS UNDO LOCK/XFER Command

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

No.

FarScan for Windows

DVT_8 or DVT_12 or DV12/16T Command

Level

533

SYS Enable PROT Command

542

Radio Tx Lock/Release

544

Radio Rx Lock/Release

8-37

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

DVT_16
No.

8-38

DVT_16 Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

002

MUX SYSTEM STATUS

003

MUX UNIT STATUS

004

EXTERNAL ALARM & CONTROL

010

FARSCAN System Code

011

Global System Monitor

220

MUX MX2 STATUS

230

MUX DC-DC STATUS

235

LOW SPEED SWITCH STATUS

521

XFER MUX TRAFFIC TO NORMAL

523

XFER MUX TRAFFIC TO STBY

525

MX2 REMOTE DS1 LOOPBACK

531

SYS UNDO XFER COMMAND

533

SYS ENABLE PROT COMMAND

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

GSTAR
No.

GSTAR Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

003

MUX Equipment Status

004

External Alarm & Control

006

Other Equipment Status

007

Software Version

013

EXT. Alarm/Relay Card Status

017

Relay Card Status & Control

026

Card Edition

115

Modem Equipment Status

140

Radio Equipment Status

164

Radio Tx/Rx Path Status

183

EXT Analog Input Status

185

Tx/Rx Frequency

186

Tx A/B Power Level

187

FFM A/B Status

188

Rx Signal Level A/B

190

RPC A/B Temperature Degrees C

191

RPC A/B Temperature Degrees F

270

Controller Configuration

271

Controller NE Address

273

Muldex I A/B Configuration

274

Muldex II/III A/B Configuration

276

Muldex I Capacity Configuration

277

Muldex A TRIB Status/Command

278

Muldex B TRIB Status/Command

280

PLS A/B Frequency Status

285

Service CH NE Address Status

286

Service CH Config. Status

350

ERR Free Second, Rx A/B

351

Errored Second, Rx A/B

352

Severely ERR SEC, Rx A/B

353

Background Block ERR, Rx A/B

355

ERR Free Second Ratio

356

Errored Second Ratio

357

Severely Error Second Ratio

358

Background Block ERR Ratio

359

Corrected Bit ERR Ratio

8-39

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

No.

8-40

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

GSTAR Command

Level

367

Corrected Bit ERR Rate Time

369

Elapsed Time (30 Days Max.)

390

Reset Performance Monitors

391

Reset Corrected BER Monitors

515

Tx/Rx Release Lock Stat/Commands

516

Tx/Rx Lock On Line Stat/Commands

517

Disable LPBK Status/Command

518

Enable LPBK Status/Commands

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

GSTAR_ME
No.

GSTAR_ME Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

003

MUX Equipment Status

004

External Alarm & Control

006

Other Equipment Status

007

Software Version

013

EXT. Alarm/Relay Card Status

017

Relay Card Status & Control

026

Card Edition

115

Modem Equipment Status

140

Radio Equipment Status

164

Radio Tx/Rx Path Status

168

Radio A Transceiver Status

169

Radio B Transceiver Status

183

EXT Analog Input Status

185

Tx/Rx Frequency

186

Tx A/B Power Level

188

Rx Signal Level A/B

190

RPC A/B Temperature Degrees C

191

RPC A/B Temperature Degrees F

270

Controller Configuration

271

Controller NE Address

273

Muldex I A/B Configuration

274

Muldex II/III A/B Configuration

276

Muldex I Capacity Configuration

277

Muldex A TRIB Status/Command

278

Muldex B TRIB Status/Command

285

Service CH NE Address Status

286

Service CH Config. Status

350

ERR Free Second, Rx A/B

351

Errored Second, Rx A/B

352

Severely ERR SEC, Rx A/B

353

Background Block ERR, Rx A/B

355

ERR Free Second Ratio

356

Errored Second Ratio

357

Severely Error Second Ratio

358

Background Block ERR Ratio

359

Corrected Bit ERR Ratio

8-41

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

No.

8-42

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

GSTAR_ME Command

Level

367

Corrected Bit ERR Rate Time

369

Elapsed Time (30 Days Max.)

390

Reset Performance Monitors

391

Reset Corrected BER Monitors

515

Tx/Rx Release Lock Stat/Commands

516

Tx/Rx Lock On Line Stat/Commands

517

Disable LPBK Status/Command

518

Enable LPBK Status/Commands

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

MEGASTAR
No.

MEGASTAR Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

004

External Alarm & Control

008

Display Equipment Address

010

Farscan System Code

014

Radio/Modem Active Report

016

Radio (RFU) Status

020

Mux Unit Status

100

Modem (SPU) Status

110

Tributary 1 Status

111

Tributary 2 Status

112

Decoder 1 Status

113

Decoder 2 Status

114

Modulator 1 Status

115

Modulator 2 Status

116

Demodulator 1 Status

117

Demodulator 2 Status

130

Radio 1 CTRL PA Status

131

Radio 2 CTRL PA Status

132

Radio 1 Tx PLS Status

133

Radio 2 Tx PLS Status

134

Radio 1 Tx SW Status

135

Radio 2 Tx SW Status

136

Radio 1 IF AMP Status

137

Radio 2 IF AMP Status

138

Radio 1 LNC Status

139

Radio 2 LNC Status

140

Radio 1 Rx PLS Status

141

Radio 2 Rx PLS Status

164

Radio 1 Tx Level

166

Radio 2 Tx Level

174

Radio 1 Rx AGC Monitor

176

Radio 2 Rx AGC Monitor

230

MUX Interface Status

231

Power Supply 1 Status

232

Power Supply 2 Status

253

Overhead Status/Command

257

VF Orderwire 1 Status/Command

8-43

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

No.

8-44

MEGASTAR Command

Level

258

VF Orderwire 2 Status/Command

259

Data Orderwire Status

261

Wayside/AIS 1 Status

262

Wayside/AIS 2 Status

263

Wayside Provisioning/Status

264

DS3 Provisioning/Status

371

Statistical Reset Req. Rx

375

Parity ERR Free Seconds, Rx 1

376

Parity ERR Free Seconds, Rx 2

377

One Parity ERR Second, Rx 1

378

One Parity ERR Second, Rx 2

379

Severely Parity ERR, Rx 1

380

Severely Parity ERR, Rx 2

385

Measurement Duration Counter 1

386

Measurement Duration Counter 2

525

Tributary 1 Status/Command

526

Tributary 2 Status/Command

528

Modulator 1 Status/Command

529

Modulator 2 Status/Command

533

SYS Enable PROT Command

535

SYS Disable PROT Command

541

Radio Tx/Rx Release Lock

543

Radio Tx/Rx Lock Active

550

Radio ATPC Status/Command

593

Download Run Time Code

900

Access IDEEPROM Configuration

908

Set Equipment Address

911

Display Port Baud Rate

912

Restore Port Baud Rate Default

913

Set Port Baud Rate

917

Display DVB Port Status

918

Restore DVB Port Default

919

Set All DVB Ports

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

mSTAR
No.

mSTAR Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

003

Indoor Unit Status

004

External Alarm Status

006

Other Equipment Status

007

Software Version

008

Display Equipment Address

014

Outdoor Unit Status

017

External Relay Status & Control

020

Software Alarm Status

021

AIS Status/Command

023

BER Status/Command

024

BER Switchiing Status/Command

026

Card Edition

027

Boot Version

100

Alternate Bank S/W Version

102

Bank Switching Status

150

Tributary 1 thru 4 Status

151

Tributary 5 thru 8 Status

160

Traffic Status

165

Remote Status

170

Rx Traffic Status

182

Tx/Rx FREQ CONFIG Status

184

Synthesizable Tx Frequency

185

Tx/Rx Frequency Status

186

Tx Power Level

188

Rx Signal Level

190

RPC Temperature Degrees C

191

RPC Temperature Degrees F

266

Tx Attenuation Status/Command

273

TRIB 1-4 Equalizer Stat/Command

274

TRIB 5-8 Equalizer Stat/Command

275

Tributary T3 Mode Status/Command

276

Capacity Configuration Status

277

Tributary Config. Status/Command

278

TRIB T1/E1 Code Status/Command

279

TRIB Code 1-4 Status/Command

280

TRIB Code 5-8 Status/Command

8-45

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

No.

8-46

mSTAR Command

Level

281

Channel Spacing Status

283

CH Number Status

284

SUB-CH Number Status

287

VF Status/Command

290

Rx Sideband Status

295

RTU Port Status

297

Link ID Status

350

ERR Free Second

351

Errored Second

352

Severely ERR SEC

354

Unavailable Ratio

355

ERR Free Second Ratio

356

Errored Second Ratio

357

Severely Error Second Ratio

359

Bit ERR Ratio

367

Bit ERR Rate Time

368

Unavailable Time

369

Elapsed Time (30 Days Max.)

390

Reset Performance Monitors

391

Reset Corrected BER Monitors

502

S/W Bank Switch Time Stat/Command

526

Capacity Configuration Command

528

Remote LPBK Status/Commands

535

Other Equipment Status/Commands

550

FEC Correction Status/Command

912

Data Port Status/Command

915

SVC ADDRESS Status/Command

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

mSTAR_P
No.

mSTAR_P Command

Level

001

Global Status

003

Indoor Unit Status

004

External Alarm Status

006

Other Equipment Status

007

Software Version

008

Display Equipment Address

014

Outdoor Unit Status

017

External Relay Status & Control

019

Cable Status

020

Software Status

021

AIS Status/Command

023

BER Status/Command

026

Card Edition

027

Boot Version

100

Alternate Bank S/W Version

150

Tributary 1 thru 4 Status

151

Tributary 5 thru 8 Status

152

Tributary 9 thru 12 Status

153

Tributary 13 thru 16 Status

165

Remote Status

170

Rx Traffic Status

172

Auto-Configuration

0
Status1

182

Tx/Rx FREQ CONFIG Status

184

Synthesizable Tx Frequency

185

Tx/Rx Frequency Status

186

Tx A Power Level

187

Tx B Power Level

188

Rx A Signal Level

189

Rx B Signal Level

190

RPC Temperature Degrees C

191

RPC Temperature Degrees F

266

Tx Attenuation Status/Command

276

Capacity Configuration Status

277

Tributary Config. Status/Command

279

TRIB Code 1-4 Status/Command

280

TRIB Code 5-8 Status/Command

8-47

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

No.

1
2

8-48

mSTAR_P Command

Level

281

TRIB Code 9-12 Status/Command

282

TRIB Code 13-16 Status/Command

283

CH Number Status

285

CH Spacing Status

287

VF Status/Command

290

Rx Sideband Status

295

RTU Port Status

297

Link ID Status

350

ERR Free Second

351

Errored Second

352

Severely ERR SEC

354

Unavailable Ratio

355

ERR Free Second Ratio

356

Errored Second Ratio

357

Severely Error Second Ratio

359

Bit ERR Ratio

367

Bit ERR Rate Time

368

Unavailable Time

369

Elapsed Time (30 Days Max.)

390

Reset Performance Monitors

391

Reset Corrected BER Monitors

502

S/W Bank Switch Time Stat/Command

524

Clear TRIB LPBK Status/Commands

525

Tributary LPBK Status/Commands

526

Capacity Configuration Command

530

Protection Mode Status/Command

535

Other Equipment Status/Commands

540

Modulation

550

FEC Correction Status/Command

912

Data Port Status/Command

915

SVC ADDRESS Status/Command

Status/Command2

Used in mSTAR_P only.


Used in Qlink_II only.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

QLINK
No.

QLINK Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

003

Muldex Equipment Status

004

External Alarm & Control

006

Other Equipment Status

008

Controller Switch Setting

010

Farscan System Code

011

Global System Monitor

018

System A Configuration

019

System B Configuration

140

Radio Equipment Status

155

Modem Equipment Status

157

SAT Channel Alarm Status

158

SAT Equipment Status

174

Radio A PWR AMP Level

175

Radio B PWR AMP Level

176

AGC A Rx Monitor

177

AGC B Rx Monitor

512

SAT Channel Status/Control

515

Tx/Rx Release Lock

516

Tx/Rx Lock On Line

526

Tributary Remote LPBK

528

1:N E3/Hi LVL Mux LPBK STAT/CTRL

8-49

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

Qlink_II
No.

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

003

Indoor Unit Status

004

External Alarm Status

006

Other Equipment Status

007

Software Version

008

Display Equipment Address

014

Outdoor Unit Status

017

External Relay Status & Control

019

Cable Status

020

Software Status

021

AIS Status/Command

023

BER Status/Command

026

Card Edition

027

Boot Version

100

Alternate Bank S/W Version

150

Tributary 1 thru 4 Status

151

Tributary 5 thru 8 Status

152

Tributary 9 thru 12 Status

153

Tributary 13 thru 16 Status

165

Remote Status

170

Rx Traffic Status

172

8-50

Qlink_II Command

Auto-Configuration

0
Status1

182

Tx/Rx FREQ CONFIG Status

184

Synthesizable Tx Frequency

185

Tx/Rx Frequency Status

186

Tx A Power Level

187

Tx B Power Level

188

Rx A Signal Level

189

Rx B Signal Level

190

RPC Temperature Degrees C

191

RPC Temperature Degrees F

266

Tx Attenuation Status/Command

276

Capacity Configuration Status

277

Tributary Config. Status/Command

279

TRIB Code 1-4 Status/Command

280

TRIB Code 5-8 Status/Command

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

No.

1
2

Qlink_II Command

Level

281

TRIB Code 9-12 Status/Command

282

TRIB Code 13-16 Status/Command

283

CH Number Status

285

CH Spacing Status

287

VF Status/Command

290

Rx Sideband Status

295

RTU Port Status

297

Link ID Status

350

ERR Free Second

351

Errored Second

352

Severely ERR SEC

354

Unavailable Ratio

355

ERR Free Second Ratio

356

Errored Second Ratio

357

Severely Error Second Ratio

359

Bit ERR Ratio

367

Bit ERR Rate Time

368

Unavailable Time

369

Elapsed Time (30 Days Max.)

390

Reset Performance Monitors

391

Reset BER Monitors

502

S/W Bank Switch Time Stat/Command

524

Clear TRIB LPBK Status/Commands

525

Tributary LPBK Status/Commands

526

Capacity Configuration Command

530

Protection Mode Status/Command

535

Other Equipment Status/Commands

540

Modulation

550

FEC Correction Status/Command

912

Data Port Status/Command

915

SVC ADDRESS Status/Command

Status/Command2

Used in mSTAR_P only.


Used in Qlink_II only.

8-51

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

SDH_1:N
No.

8-52

SDH_1:N Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

004

External Alarm & Control

008

Display Equipment Address

010

Farscan System Code

016

Radio (RFU) Status

100

Modem (SPU) Status

110

Tributary 1 Status

111

Tributary 2 Status

112

Decoder 1 Status

113

Decoder 2 Status

114

Modulator 1 Status

115

Modulator 2 Status

116

Demodulator 1 Status

117

Demodulator 2 Status

118

Switch Interface Status

130

Radio 1 CTRL PA Status

131

Radio 2 CTRL PA Status

132

Radio 1 Tx PLS Status

133

Radio 2 Tx PLS Status

136

Radio 1 IF AMP Status

137

Radio 2 IF AMP Status

138

Radio 1 LNC Status

139

Radio 2 LNC Status

140

Radio 1 Rx PLS Status

141

Radio 2 Rx PLS Status

150

System Protection Status

151

Protection Channel Status

160

Channel Traffic Status

164

Radio 1 Tx Level

166

Radio 2 Tx Level

174

Radio 1 Rx AGC Monitor

176

Radio 2 Rx AGC Monitor

231

Power Supply 1 Status

232

Power Supply 2 Status

253

Overhead Status/Command

257

VF Orderwire 1 Status/Command

258

VF Orderwire 2 Status/Command

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

No.

8-53

SDH_1:N Command

Level

259

Data Orderwire Status

261

Wayside/AIS 1 Status

262

Wayside/AIS 2 Status

371

Statistical Reset Req. Rx

375

Parity ERR Free Seconds, Rx 1

376

Parity ERR Free Seconds, Rx 2

377

One Parity ERR Second, Rx 1

378

One Parity ERR Second, Rx 2

379

Severely Parity ERR, Rx 1

380

Severely Parity ERR, Rx 2

385

Measurement Duration Counter 1

386

Measurement Duration Counter 2

525

Tributary 1 Status/Command

526

Tributary 2 Status/Command

550

Radio ATPC Status/Command

560

1:N PROT. Switching Command

562

Undo Manual Switching Command

568

1:N CH Priority Status/Command

569

Value of N Status/Command

593

Download Run Time Code

900

Access IDEEPROM Configuration

908

Set Equipment Address

910

Port Connection Status

911

Display Port Baud Rate

912

Restore Port Baud Rate Default

913

Set Port Baud Rate

917

Display DVB Port Status

918

Restore DVB Port Default

919

Set All DVB Ports

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

Aurora58
No.

8-54

Aurora58 Command

Level

001

GLOBAL STATUS

006

Common Equipment Status

008

Display Equipment Address

010

Farscan System Code

014

Local Radio/Modem Status

015

Remote Radio/Modem Status

201

Display LOC/REM Power

202

Display PN Code

203

Display Frequency

204

Display Configuration

501

Set Frequency REM to LOC

502

Set Frequency LOC to REM

503

Set PN Code REM to LOC

504

Set PN Code LOC to REM

511

Set Local Rx Frequency

512

Set Local Tx Frequency

513

Set Local Rx PN Code

514

Set Local Tx PN Code

908

Set Equipment Address

Chapter 8: Manual Commands

8-55

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

8-56

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

CHAPTER 9

AutoPoll
Chapter
Contents

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Master FarScan AutoPoll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Describes how the Master FarScan computer runs AutoPoll.

Remote FarScan AutoPoll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4


Describes how Remote FarScan computers can run AutoPoll or
monitor another computers AutoPoll session.

Master or Monitor Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5


Explains when to run AutoPoll as a master or monitor system.

Using AutoPoll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7


Explains how to use AutoPoll to automatically interrogate the
Harris radio network.

9-1

Chapter 9: AutoPoll

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

9-2

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Introduction

FarScan for Windows

AutoPoll interrogates system status by issuing a global inquiry to all


equipments listed in the FarScan equipment file. AutoPoll reviews the
responses and, depending on the type of response (normal or
abnormal) determines whether a secondary command is necessary. If
an abnormal condition is reported, AutoPoll issues a sequence of
commands until the condition is pinpointed and defined.
AutoPoll can be run by a Master or Remote FarScan computer. The
AutoPoll session being run on one computer can be viewed remotely
by any other FarScan computer daisy chained to the network.
AutoPoll provides an automatic, continuously updated display of
commands and responses sent to each equipment which can be
logged. For more details, refer to Logging Equipment Activity on
page 7-5.

Master FarScan
AutoPoll

Only one AutoPoll session can be run at a time in a FarScan network;


however, the Master FarScan computer retains priority. If it is
running AutoPoll, any Remote FarScan computer that attempts to run
AutoPoll will be shut out by the Master.
Remote FarScan computers can monitor and log the Master
FarScans AutoPoll activity by enabling the Remote button in the
AutoPoll window. When this is done, and Enable Poll to Dual
(Ctrl+E) is selected by the Remote computer, the Master FarScans
AutoPoll responses will appear in the Remote computers AutoPoll
review window.

9-3

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 9: AutoPoll

Remote
FarScan
AutoPoll

Any Remote FarScan computer daisy chained to the network can run
AutoPoll. However, only one computer in the network can run
AutoPoll at a time.

STOP

Do not connect more than one daisy chain of FarScan computers to a


Harris radio network. An AutoPoll session that is running on one
FarScan computer in one daisy chain cannot be viewed by another
Monitor Master FarScan computer connected to another part of the
radio network. It will also cause erroneous responses and alarms to
appear.
In order for a Remote FarScan computer to run AutoPoll, an Enable
Poll to Dual request must first be sent to the Master FarScan
computer. If the APoll LED in the main FarScan window flashes blue
and white after Enable Poll to Dual is selected, an AutoPoll session
is already running elsewhere in the network.
If Enable Poll to Dual is not selected, a series of no response
messages will appear in the Remote computers AutoPoll review
window.
If a Remote FarScan computer attempts to initiate AutoPoll while the
Master is running it, the Master will automatically shut out that
computer. The following message will be displayed on the Remote
computer: AutoPoll shut down by Master.

9-4

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Likewise, if one Remote FarScan computer is running AutoPoll, and


another Remote computer attempts to run it, the AutoPoll farthest
away from the Master in the daisy chain will be shut down. For
example, refer to the following diagram:
Master
FarScan
#0
VersaT1lity Multiplexer or
MegaStar SPU

Remote
FarScan
#4

Remote
FarScan
#8

If Remote FarScan #8 is running AutoPoll, and Remote FarScan #4


starts AutoPoll, Remote FarScan #8s AutoPoll will be shut down
because it is the farthest from the Master FarScan in the daisy chain.
Remote FarScan #4 will start running AutoPoll. If Master FarScan
starts AutoPoll at this point, Remote FarScan #4 will be shut out.
If a Remote FarScans AutoPoll is shut down by the Master or
another Remote computer, its equipment activity log will be timestamped and a notation made that AutoPoll was cancelled. If the
Remote button was enabled, AutoPoll responses appear on a gray
background, indicating that another computer was running AutoPoll.

Master or
Monitor
Systems

Master and Monitor FarScan computers can run AutoPoll as a master


system or as a remote system. (These choices are given in the
AutoPoll setup procedure, which is described later in this chapter.)

Using AutoPoll as a Master System


Occasionally, during equipment maintenance and troubleshooting,
alarms can appear momentarily. These alarms, called latched alarms,
can only be cleared when AutoPoll is run as a master system.

9-5

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 9: AutoPoll

Do not run AutoPoll as a Master System from Monitor FarScan


computers to avoid clearing latched alarms from Master FarScan. If
latched alarms are cleared in this manner, Master FarScan will have
no record that they existed.
TE
NO

If a MegaStar radio is part of the FarScan network, all FarScan


computers should be set to AutoPoll as a Master System.

Using AutoPoll as a Monitor System


When AutoPoll as a Monitor System is enabled, all latched alarm
information is reserved for Master FarScan. This option should be
enabled in all additional FarScan computers in the same network so
that Master FarScan still has access to latched alarms.

9-6

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Using AutoPoll

FarScan for Windows

To run AutoPoll using a Master or Monitor FarScan computer, do the


following:
Step 1

Turn the system connection online.

Step 2

If necessary, load the correct database, equipment file and


poll file. (See page 6-3.)

NO

TE

In order for any FarScan computer in the network to view AutoPoll


remotely, each computer must have the same database (*.pol or
*.mga), equipment (*.eqw) and password (*.nkp) files.
Step 3

If you want to log AutoPoll commands and responses,


enable a log mode. (See page 7-5.)

Step 4

Click the
button or select Operation and AutoPoll
from the main menu. The AutoPoll window will appear:

Step 5

Set up the delay in seconds between inquiries, equipments


and cycles.

Step 6

Select the mode. If you are running AutoPoll from a


computer in a permanent FarScan network, enable
AutoPoll as a master system.

9-7

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 9: AutoPoll

If you are running AutoPoll from a temporary location


(Monitoring Master FarScan) in the same network, select
AutoPoll as a monitor system.
Step 7

If a DVA is included in the FarScan equipment network,


select Update when requested. This enables DVA
memory updates if the DVA loses power or a protection
card is pulled or replaced.

Step 8

If you made any changes to the settings, click Apply.

TE
NO

If AutoPoll is already being run by another computer in the network,


type Ctrl+E (Enable Poll to Dual) and click the Remote button to
monitor the AutoPoll responses.
Step 9

Click Start. The button will change to Stop when


AutoPoll starts.

While AutoPoll is running, the AutoPoll LED will turn green and the
computer will emit a short beep each time an alarm or change of state
response is received. You can turn the beep off by pressing Ctrl+F6.
Responses will be displayed in the Review portion of the AutoPoll
window. New or changed responses appear in red. Monitor FarScan
inquiries will appear on a gray background.
To stop AutoPoll, click Stop. The AutoPoll LED will turn blue to
indicate inactive status.
To pause AutoPoll, click Pause. This button will change to
Continue and the AutoPoll LED will turn yellow.
TE
NO

For a simultaneous graphical display of AutoPoll commands and


responses, refer to page 7-25, Viewing a Summary Display.

9-8

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Copying Individual AutoPoll Responses


FarScan allows you to copy AutoPoll commands and responses to the
Microsoft Windows clipboard. When they are copied to the
clipboard, they may be pasted into the body of an e-mail or into a
text-editing program such as Windows Notepad.
Step 1

To copy a line of AutoPoll information, click on the desired


command or response line in the response portion of the
AutoPoll window.
To select multiple lines, click on the first line to highlight
it, hold down the Shift key and click on the last line.

Step 2

When the desired information has been highlighted, press


Ctrl+c. This will copy the data to the Windows clipboard.

Step 3

Open the application to paste the text into and press


Ctrl+v. The text will be pasted into the application.

9-9

Chapter 9: AutoPoll

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

9-10

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

CHAPTER 10

SelectPoll

Chapter
Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Command Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Explains the levels of commands that are available for
SelectPoll and how they should be assigned.

Creating (Appending) a SelectPoll File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4


Describes how to create a new SelectPoll file or append to an
existing file. A SelectPoll file must exist before you can run the
SelectPoll utility.

Editing a SelectPoll File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8


Describes how to edit information in an existing SelectPoll
file.

Loading a SelectPoll File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12


Describes how to load an existing SelectPoll file.

Printing a SelectPoll File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14


Describes how to print the information in a specific SelectPoll
file.

Configuring SelectPoll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15


Describes how to configure the SelectPoll file. It must be
properly configured before you can run the SelectPoll utility.

Using SelectPoll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16


Describes how to run the SelectPoll utility.

10-1

Chapter 10: SelectPoll

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

10-2

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Introduction

FarScan for Windows

SelectPoll enables you to customize FarScans automatic status


interrogation of the radio network. With it, you can select specific
radios in the network to poll and assign an equipment-specific list of
interrogation commands.
When you select the interrogation commands in SelectPoll, you can
assign various levels to them. This feature is explained further in
Command Levels.
While SelectPoll is running, it displays the equipment being
interrogated, the command level, number and description, time of
interrogation, and system response. When the interrogations and
responses fill the window, a scroll bar will appear to the right of the
window that you can use to scroll through the information.
SelectPoll runs concurrently with AutoPoll, which is a general system
status polling utility. AutoPoll is described in Chapter 9, AutoPoll.

Command
Levels

When you set up the SelectPoll file information, you will need to
assign certain levels to the interrogation commands. There is one
Normal level and 31 Abnormal levels.
By assigning levels to commands, you can create a very specific
reporting sequence that can pinpoint the source of abnormal
conditions in the equipment.
SelectPoll will issue commands marked Normal or N first. If the
system responds with an abnormal condition report, SelectPoll will
issue the next command level, which would be Abnormal_1 or
A1. If an abnormal condition is reported to this command, then
SelectPoll issues the next command level, Abnormal_2 or A2,
and so on.
You will be asked to assign command levels when creating,
appending to or editing a SelectPoll file.

10-3

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 10: SelectPoll

Creating
(Appending) a
SelectPoll File

This section describes how to create a SelectPoll file. When FarScan


is used for the first time, this file should be created. It can be edited
later (see Editing a SelectPoll File on page 10-8).
To create a new file, do the following:

10-4

Step 1

Make sure the correct database is loaded. Refer to


Loading a Database on page 6-3.

Step 2

From the FarScan main menu, select Utilities and


SelectPoll File Editor. The following window will appear:

Step 3

Click the Create button. Any equipment information in


the SelectPoll File Editor window will disappear.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 4

Click the Append button. An equipment list will appear:

Step 5

Highlight the equipment you want to include in the


SelectPoll file and click OK or double-click it. A Poll
Edit window will appear:

Step 6

Highlight a SelectPoll command in the Choice list.

10-5

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 10: SelectPoll

Step 7

Click the Next or Prev buttons to scroll through the


different normal and abnormal command levels. (The level
status appears in the Level field in the upper left-hand
corner of the window.)
For a description of how the normal and abnormal levels
should be used, refer to Command Levels on page 10-3.

Step 8

When the desired command level appears, either doubleclick the highlighted command or click the left-arrow
button to move it to the Selected list.

Step 9

Repeat Steps 6 through 8 until you have selected the


commands to run in SelectPoll.

Step 10 Click OK. A Same Equipment window will appear


displaying a list of the same types of equipment:

Step 11 To apply the SelectPoll commands to other equipment,


highlight the desired equipment and click the left arrow
button or double-click the equipment name. The name will
move to the Selected list.
To remove an item from the Selected list, double-click it
or highlight it and click the right arrow button.
Step 12 Click OK. You will be returned to the SelectPoll File
Editor window. The new information will appear.

10-6

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 13 Click Save As. A Save As window will appear:

Step 14 Type a unique file name for the new SelectPoll file. Make
sure it has a .pol extension. Click OK.
Step 15 The new poll files name and path will appear in the File
Info portion of the window. Click Close.
To edit a SelectPoll file, go to Editing a SelectPoll File on page 10-8.

10-7

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 10: SelectPoll

Editing a
SelectPoll File

Once a SelectPoll file has been created, it can be changed using the
SelectPoll File Editor.
Step 1

Make sure the correct database is loaded. Refer to


Loading a Database on page 6-3.

Step 2

From the FarScan main menu, select Utilities and


SelectPoll File Editor. The following window will appear:

TE
O

If an equipment list does not appear, the equipment and database files
corresponding to the SelectPoll file have not been loaded. Refer to
Loading a Database on page 6-3 and load the correct files.
Step 3

10-8

Select the equipment to edit from the list in the upper lefthand portion of the window.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 4

FarScan for Windows

Click the Edit button. A Poll Edit window will appear:

Deleting a Command
Step 5

Click the Next or Prev buttons to scroll through the


various levels of commands.

Step 6

When you find the command to remove from the


Selected list, highlight it and click the Remove button.

Adding a Command
Step 7

To add a new command, highlight a SelectPoll command in


the Choice list.

Step 8

Click the Next or Prev buttons to scroll through the


different command levels. (The level status appears in the
Level field in the upper left-hand corner of the window.)
For a description of how the normal and abnormal levels
should be used, refer to Command Levels on page 10-3.

Step 9

When the desired command level appears, either doubleclick the highlighted command or click the left-arrow
button to move it to the Selected list.

Step 10 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to delete unwanted commands.


Repeat steps 7 through 9 to add commands.

10-9

Chapter 10: SelectPoll

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 11 When the commands have been selected, click OK. A


Same Equipment window will appear. This window
displays a list of the same types of equipment in the
Choice portion.

Step 12 To apply the SelectPoll commands to similar equipment,


highlight the desired equipment and click the left arrow
button or double-click the equipment name. The name will
move to the Selected list.
To remove an item from the Selected list, double-click it
or highlight it and click the right arrow button.
Step 13 Click OK. You will be returned to the SelectPoll File
Editor window. The new information will appear.
Step 14 Click Save As. A Save As window will appear:

10-10

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 15 To preserve the original file, type in a new file name. Make
sure the file name has a .pol extension.

!
You can overwrite the existing file by typing in the original file name.
Do not overwrite the original *.pol files that were installed with
FarScan. (The original file names are a variation of scan*.pol.)

10-11

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 10: SelectPoll

Loading a
SelectPoll File

All of the SelectPoll files have a .pol extension and are stored on
the FarScan computers hard drive. There are two ways to load a
specific SelectPoll file.
The first way is to load it is while the FarScan connection is offline.
(Refer to Loading a Database on page 6-3 for instructions.) The
second way is to load the SelectPoll file while FarScan is running.
STOP

The SelectPoll file must be compatible with the database and


equipment files that are already in use by FarScan. Otherwise, a
Could not load Poll file! message will appear.
Step 1

10-12

From the FarScan main menu, select Utilities and


SelectPoll File Editor. The following window will
appear:

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 2

Click the Load button. The Open window will appear:

Step 3

Highlight the SelectPoll file to load and click OK.

Step 4

The message, Should this file be set as default? will


appear. Click Yes.

Step 5

Click Close in the SelectPoll File Editor window. When


the message All changes you have made will take effect.
Are you sure? appears, click Yes. The new file will be
loaded.

10-13

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 10: SelectPoll

Printing a
SelectPoll File

You can print out the current SelectPoll file information which
includes selected equipment, commands and command levels, as well
as AutoPoll information for all types of equipment in the database.
To print the SelectPoll file information, do the following:

10-14

Step 1

Make sure the correct database is loaded. (Refer to


Loading a Database on page 6-3.)

Step 2

Load the SelectPoll file to print. (Refer to Loading a


SelectPoll File.)

Step 3

Make sure the correct printer is selected. In the FarScan


main menu, select File and Printer Setup. Make any
necessary changes and click OK.

Step 4

To change the printers type style, select File and


Printer Font Setup. The window that appears will give
you a list of fonts to choose from. Make your selection and
click OK.

Step 5

From the main menu, select Utilities and SelectPoll File


Editor.

Step 6

Click the Print button. The contents of the SelectPoll file


will be printed.

Step 7

Click Close to close the window.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Configuring
SelectPoll

FarScan for Windows

You can specify the delay between polling processes by doing the
following:
Step 1

From the main menu, click Operation. Select


SelectPoll. The setup information appears on the lefthand side of the window.
Inquiries - The delay (in seconds) between each
consecutive inquiry to an equipment.
Equipments - The delay (in seconds) between polling
equipments (i.e. the time between completing a poll at one
equipment and beginning a poll at the next equipment).
Cycles - The delay (in seconds) between polling the last
equipment and polling the first equipment.

Step 2

Set the Inquiries delay.

Step 3

Set the Equipments interval.

Step 4

Set the Cycles interval.

Step 5

Click Apply and Close to save the changes and close


the window.

10-15

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 10: SelectPoll

Using
SelectPoll

To start SelectPoll, do the following:


Step 1

Make sure the system connection is turned online. (Refer to


Starting FarScan on page 4-3.)

Step 2

From Operation in the main menu, select SelectPoll or


click
. The following window will appear:

Step 3

Click Start. The SelectPoll process will begin.


To pause SelectPoll, click Pause. The button will change
to Continue.

TE
O

You can not exit FarScan with SelectPoll paused. Stop the process
using the Stop button before exiting the program.
After the SelectPoll process begins, the Start button will
change to Stop. Stop SelectPoll by clicking Stop.
Clear the message field by clicking the Clear button.
TE
NO

For a simultaneous graphical display of AutoPoll commands and


responses, refer to page 7-25, Viewing a Summary Display.

10-16

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Copying Individual SelectPoll Responses


FarScan allows you to copy individual SelectPoll commands and
responses to the Microsoft Windows clipboard. When they are copied
to the clipboard, they may be pasted into the body of an e-mail or into
a text-editing program such as Windows Notepad.
Step 1

To copy a line of SelectPoll information, click on the


desired command or response line in the response portion
of the SelectPoll window.
To select multiple lines, click on the first line to highlight
it, hold down the Shift key and click on the last line in the
group.

Step 2

When the desired information has been highlighted, press


Ctrl+c. This will copy the data to the Windows clipboard.

Step 3

Open the application to paste the text into and press


Ctrl+v. The text will be pasted into the application.

10-17

Chapter 10: SelectPoll

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

10-18

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

CHAPTER 11

FarScan Utilities

Chapter
Contents

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Provides an overview of FarScan Utilities.

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Describes how to install the software.

Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Describes the features of the primary windows.

Using FarScan Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17


Provides instructions on how to customize the view and edit
messages.

Programming DVA Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28


Provides instructions on how to program DVA input, output
and analog input parameters. Describes how to write
programmable alarm indicator (PAI) equations.

Resetting DVA Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-49


Gives instructions on how to reset the DVA with the new
information, and how to review the edited messages in
FarScan.

11-1

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

11-2

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Introduction

FarScan for Windows

Overview
This manual provides information for customizing FarScan responses
based on the way you configured your system.
Message Editing
FarScan Utilities enhances the alarm reporting capability of FarScan
for Windows. This powerful utility, which runs independently of
FarScan, enables you to customize the text of response messages on
selected commands. It does not, however, allow alteration of the
content or function of a poll or manual command.
DVA Parameters
With FarScan Utilities, you can also set operating parameters for an
associated DVA (Digital VersaT1lity Alarm) system.
TE
NO

For detailed information on setting up and using a DVA unit, refer to


the DVA instruction manual.
Computer Requirements
For a list of computer requirements, refer to page 2-3.

11-3

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Installation

11-4

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows must be installed before you can install


FarScan Utilities. The FarScan Utilities files will be installed in the
FarScan for Windows directory. To install FarScan Utilities, do the
following:
Step 1

Make sure FarScan for Windows has already been


installed.

Step 2

Close all Windows applications that are open.

Step 3

Insert the first disk of the FarScan Utilities set.

Step 4

In Windows 95 or NT, open the Start menu and select


Run. The Run window will appear.

Step 5

Type A:\SETUP in the field. Click OK.

Step 6

Follow the prompts on the screen to complete the


installation.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Running FarScan Concurrently


FarScan and FarScan Utilities can not use the same database at the
same time. So, in order for FarScan to continue running while you
edit messages, you must copy the database files to another directory
for FarScan Utilities. Do the following:
Step 1

Create a new folder in the FarScan for Windows directory


called Temp.

Step 2

Locate the following files that you will be working with


and copy them into the new Temp folder:
Scan*.* (database files)
*.dva (DVA parameter file)
*.eqw (equipment file)

Step 3

(Optional) In Windows Explorer, rename the database


(Scan*.*) files you copied into the Temp folder. Make each
name identical, but do not change the suffixes. Refer to the
following example:

File names
changed to
temp.*

STOP

If you rename the files, make a note of their original names. You will
have to return them to the FarScan directory when you are finished
editing messages.
Step 4

When you log on to FarScan Utilities, you will need to


open the copied database files. Continue with Logging
On on page 11-6.

11-5

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Logging On
You must have level 7 access to FarScan in order to log on to FarScan
Utilities. For more information, refer to Chapter 4.
Step 1

Select FarScan Utilities from the Windows Start menu,


or double-click the FarScan Utilities icon
. The
FarScan Utilities logon window will appear:

Step 2

In the logon window, enter the FarScan level 7 user name


and password. The default setting is FARSCAN (user
name) and MANAGER (password). Click OK.

TE
NO

FarScan Utilities uses the same logon information as FarScan for


Windows. If the FarScan for Windows level 7 logon information has
been changed, you will need to enter that information.
If this is the first time FarScan Utilities has been used, or if
an equipment file has not been set as default, the Open
Database window will appear:

11-6

Step 3

If necessary, click Select to select the correct database


and equipment files. (Be sure to select the files you copied
to the temp directory in Running FarScan Concurrently.)

Step 4

To continue, skip to Using FarScan Utilities on page 1117. To familiarize yourself with FarScan Utilities, go to
Features on page 11-7.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Features

FarScan for Windows

Main Window
When you log on to FarScan Utilities, the main window will appear:

Main Menu
Tool Bar
Database
Information

Help/Status Line

Menu
The menu is located at the top of the main window, and consists of
four categories. Each category activates a popup menu when you
click on it. The procedures given in this manual describe which
category to click on and which item to select from the popup menu.
The categories are as follows:
File

Open

Loads a different database file.


Exit

Exits FarScan Utilities.


Editors

Equipment Editor

Opens the Equipment File Editor window.


External Message Editor

Opens the External Message Editor window.


DVA parameters...

Opens the DVA parameter editor window.


View

Tool Icon

Displays the tool bar when checked.


Help Line

Displays the context-sensitive help line at the bottom


of the window when checked.

11-7

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

File Status

Shows the currently loaded database and equipment


files when checked.
Current Date/Time

Displays the current date and time when checked.


Set default view

Returns the view to the default setting.


Get online help and general FarScan Utilities
information.

Help

Shortcuts
Certain keyboard shortcuts are available that enable you to
immediately bring up certain windows or functions. The keyboard
shortcuts for the main window are as follows:
Shortcut

Function

F1

Opens online help.

F10

Exits FarScan Utilities.

Icons
The tool bar contains buttons (or icons) that can be clicked to carry
out certain functions. The buttons correspond to commands found in
the FarScan Utilities main menu. To activate a button, click it once
with the mouse.
The buttons in the tool bar are described below.
Exits FarScan Utilities.
Brings up the Open Database window.
Opens the Equipment File Editor window.
Opens the External Message Editor window.
Opens the DVA Parameter editor window.
Brings up the FarScan Utilities online help file.

TE
O

To begin using FarScan Utilities, skip to page 11-17.

11-8

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

External Message Editor Window


FarScan responses can be edited in the Message Editor Window.
When you click the Message Editor icon
or select Editors and
External Message Editor from the FarScan Utilities main menu, the
following window will appear:

Main Menu
Tool Bars
Equipment
Selection
Equipment
Messages

Help/Status Line

Menu
Five topics are available for selection from the External Message
Editors main menu:
File

Save

Saves the current data.


Print Setup

Sets up the printer.


Print

Prints the current data.


Exit

Exits the External Message Editor window and


returns to the FarScan Utilities main window.
Edit

Undo

Undoes the last change. Capable of undoing a string


of up to five changes.
Copy

Copies the current selection to the clipboard.


Copy To

Copies the selected data to another equipment.

11-9

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Paste

Pastes the copied data into another highlighted field.


Select All

Selects an entire column of responses.


Restore Original

Restores any edited line to its original, factory


default setting, even after a file has been saved or reopened. (Not the same as Undo.)
Edit

Brings up the Edit window when a message is


highlighted.
View

Toolbar

Displays the tool bar when checked.


Help Line

Displays the context-sensitive help line at the bottom


of the window when checked.
File Status

Shows the currently loaded database and equipment


files when checked.
Current Date/Time

Displays the current date and time when checked.


Set default view

Returns the view to the default setting.


Option

Change Equipment

Changes the responses for the equipment displayed


in the selected column to another equipment.
Panes

Changes the number of panes (columns) displayed in


the External Message Editor window. (You can
choose one, two or three panes.)
Columns Align

Restores columns to their default width if the size has


been changed.
Message Font

Changes the appearance of the message text within


the columns.
Help

Contents

Brings up the table of contents for the online help


file.

11-10

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Search

Brings up a search window in which you can type a


specific word or term to find.
About Editor

Displays version and copyright information for the


External Message Editor.
Shortcuts
The keyboard shortcuts for the External Message Editor window are
as follows:
Shortcut

Function

Description

F1

Help

Opens online help.

F10

Close

Exits the External Message Editor window


and returns to the main FarScan Utilities
window.

Ctrl+p

Print

Prints a selection or column of messages.

Ctrl+s

Save

Saves the current information.

Ctrl+z

Undo

Undoes the last change or sequence of


changes (up to five).

Ctrl+c

Copy

Copies a selected message or block of


messages to the clipboard.

Copy to
equipment

Copies a selected message or block of


messages to another equipment.

Ctrl+v

Paste

Pastes a selected message or block of


messages from the clipboard to a
highlighted area in another column.

Ctrl+a

Select all

Selects all items in a column.

Alt+r

Restore
original

Restores a changed message to the original


factory default message.

Alt+d

Edit

Brings up the Edit window when a message


is selected.

Alt+c

Change
Equipment

Changes the column display to another


equipment.

F8

Alt+1

One Pane

Changes the column view to a single pane.

Alt+2

Two Panes

Changes the column view to two panes.

Alt+3

Three Panes

Changes the column view to three panes.

Alt+g

Columns Align

Restores all columns to their default width.

Alt+t

Message Font

Changes the appearance of the message text


within the columns.

11-11

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Icons
Closes the External Message Editor window.
Saves the file.
Opens the Edit window to change message parameters.
Undoes the last action or sequence of up to five actions.
Copies the selection and puts it on the clipboard.
Copies the selection to another equipment.
Inserts (pastes) the clipboard contents.
Selects all messages for the current equipment.
Aligns the columns; restores three-column default setting.
Replaces the equipment with another selection.
Prints messages (a selection or entire column) to a printer.
Displays the FarScan Utilities version and copyright
information.
Moves cursor to DVA relay input messages.
Moves cursor to DVA relay output messages.
Moves cursor to DVA analog messages.
Moves cursor to Programmable Alarm Indicators.
Moves cursor to Group 1 of the DVA messages.
Moves cursor to Group 2 of the DVA messages.
Moves cursor to Group 3 of the DVA messages.
TE
NO

To begin using FarScan Utilities, skip to page 11-17.

11-12

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

DVA Input Parameters Window


To access the DVA Input Parameters window, click
or select
Editors and DVA parameters from the FarScan Utilities main
menu. The DVA Parameters File Editor window showing input
parameters will appear:
Main Menu
Tool Bar

Equipment
Message

Graphical Display

Input Parameter
Settings
Help/Status Line

There are three monitor control groups: Group 1, Group 2 and Group
3. The input parameter settings for each Group are divided into four
sub groups.
The settings for Group 1 are divided into sub groups A, B, C and D.
The sub groups for Group 2 are E, F, G and H. For Group 3, they are
I, J, K and L. The alphabetic sequence provides easy identification
when writing programmable alarm indicator equations. (More
information on programmable alarm indicators appears on page 1143.)
A sub group contains two subsets of pins: 1 through 4 and 5 through
8. Each subset can be set for an Open alarm or Ground alarm
condition. Debounce delays, or recognition delays, can be set for each
of the eight pins.

11-13

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Menu
Seven topics are available for selection from the DVA Parameters
File Editor main menu:
File

Save

Saves the current data.


Print

Prints the current data.


Print Setup

Sets up the printer.


Exit

Exits the External Message Editor window and


returns to the FarScan Utilities main window.
Edit

Undo

Undoes the last change.


Copy

Copies the DVA parameters to another group.


Copy to equipment

Copies DVA parameters to other DVA equipment.


Copy from equipment

Copies DVA parameters from other DVA


equipment.
Set default

Restores the DVA parameters to the original factory


setting.
Equipment

Select new

Selects a new DVA for editing.


DVA Parameters

Toggles between the DVA Input, Output, Analog and


PAI editor windows.
Group

Toggles between DVA parameters Groups 1, 2 and 3.

View

Toolbar

Displays the tool bar when checked.


Equipment Info

Displays equipment information when checked.


Status Bar

Displays the help line at the bottom left of the


window when checked.

11-14

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Set default view

Returns the view to the default setting.


Help

Contents

Brings up the table of contents for the online help


file.
Search

Brings up a search window in which you can type a


specific word or term to find.
About DVA Parameters File Editor...

Displays version and copyright information for the


DVA Parameter File Editor.
Shortcuts
Shortcut

Function

Description

Ctrl+p

Print

Prints a selection or column of messages.

Ctrl+s

Save

Saves the current information.

Ctrl+F2

Exit

Exits the DVA Parameters File Editor


window and returns to the FarScan Utilities
main window.

Ctrl+z

Undo

Undoes the last change.

Ctrl+c

Copy

Copies the changes to a new DVA


parameter group.

Alt+F1

Group 1

Toggles to the parameters in Group 1.

Alt+F2

Group 2

Toggles to the parameters in Group 2.

Alt+F3

Group 3

Toggles to the parameters in Group 3.

11-15

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Icons
Closes the DVA Parameters File Editor window.
Saves changes to the file.
Changes to the DVA input parameter editor window.
Changes to the DVA output (relay) parameter editor window.
Changes to the DVA analog parameter editor window.
Changes to the Programmable Alarm Indicator editor window.
Changes to the Group 1 DVA parameter (input, output and
analog) window.
Changes to the Group 2 DVA parameter (input, output and
analog) window.
Changes to the Group 3 DVA parameter (input, output and
analog) window.
Copies DVA parameters to another group (input, output and
analog).
Copies DVA parameters to another DVA equipment.
Copies DVA parameters from another DVA equipment.
Sets the changed DVA parameters to default.
TE
NO

To begin using FarScan Utilities, go to page 11-17.

11-16

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Using FarScan
Utilities

FarScan for Windows

Editing Messages

TE
NO

Messages edited with an earlier version of FarScan (such as FarScan


4.0) can not be edited with the Windows version of Message Editor.
Before you begin editing messages, you will need to know the
following:
How many PIO cards are installed in the computer (see application
note # 3 on page 14-9).
What items are connected to the relays on the back panel of the
DVA.

TE
O

To customize the view, go to Customizing the View on page 11-24.


To edit the messages that report back to FarScan, do the following:
Step 1

Click on the Message Editor icon


. The External
Message Editor window will appear:

11-17

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 2

Click on the Equipment Type pull-down menu and select


an item from the list:

Step 3

Click on the Command Table pull-down menu and select


an item from the list:

The editable factory default commands for all equipment of


the selected type will appear:

Column Heading

Edited Summary
Column

The window is divided into three panes, or columns. (For


details on changing this view, refer to Editing Messages
on page 11-17.)

11-18

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

TE
NO

If you select the DVA equipment type and command table 060
Users Editable Labels, the first 12 items that appear in the message
list are for DM products only. Messages 13 on are for the general
DVA product.
Edited Summary messages are followed by a tilde (~)
which keeps them from appearing in the FarScan Summary
Display (described on page 7-25). When you edit the
message, remove the tilde so that it appears in the
Summary Display when FarScan interrogates the
equipment.
Step 4

Select the equipment to edit messages. To do this, move the


cursor to the column where the equipment is listed.
Highlight the message to change and double-click or rightclick with the mouse. The Edit window will appear:

Step 5

Type the new text in the Message field and click OK.
If the equipment you want to edit isnt listed in one of the
three columns, click on the title bar of one of the columns.
The Change Equipment window will appear:

11-19

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Highlight the equipment to change to and click OK. The


message list for that equipment will appear in the column.
Step 6

Click
or select File and Save from the menu to
save the changes.

Restoring Edited Messages to Factory Default


If you need to restore edited messages to the factory default, do the
following:

11-20

Step 1

Highlight the message to restore.

Step 2

Select Edit and Restore Original from the External


Message Editor menu or type Alt+r. The message will
return to the default setting.

Step 3

Click
or select File and Save from the menu to
save the changes.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Enabling Messages for FarScan Summary Display


If you want the message for an input, output or analog point to report
to FarScans Summary Display, remove the tilde (~) from the end of
the text line. To remove it, do the following:
Step 1

In the column titled Edited Summary, highlight the


message and press Enter. Press End once and backspace to
delete the tilde, or,
Double-click on the message or right-click with the mouse.
The Edit window will appear:

Click on the box next to Ignore Summary Report to


remove the checkmark. The tilde will disappear. Click
OK.

TE
O

Some messages are too long for the tilde to be displayed, such as
DVA Grp1,ANALOG C1+,D1-. To see if the message is enabled
for Summary Display, double-click it to bring up the Edit window. If
Ignore Summary Report is not checked, the message is enabled.
Step 2

Click
or select File and Save from the menu to
save the changes.

11-21

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Copying Edited Messages


You can copy edited messages from one equipment to another by
doing the following:
Step 1

Click on the message you want to copy. (To copy a block of


messages, click on the first one, hold down the Shift key,
and click on the last message of the group.)

Step 2

Select Edit and Copy from the menu or type Ctrl+c.


Click in the next column and select Edit and Paste
from the menu, or type Ctrl+v.

TE
NO

Make sure you paste the edited messages to the same line numbers as
in the column you copied them from. Otherwise, the copied messages
will be assigned to the wrong pins.
Step 3

If youd like to copy the selected messages to another


equipment that is not displayed, select Edit and Copy
To or press F8. This will bring up the following window:

Select the equipment. If you want the changes to be copied


to all equipment, enable All Equipment in the bottom left
of the window. Click OK.
Step 4

11-22

Click
or select File and Save from the menu to
save the changes.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Printing Edited Messages


You can print edited messages to a local printer. In order to do so, you
must have a dot-matrix or laser printer connected to the computer
where FarScan Utilities is loaded.
To print edited messages from FarScan Utilities, do the following:
Step 1

Open the External Message Editor window.

Step 2

To print a block of edited messages, click the first message,


hold down the Shift key, and click the last message.

Step 3

Select File and Print from the menu, or click


Print window will appear:

. The

If you selected a block of messages, Selection will be


enabled in the Print Range portion of the window.
To print all messages for an equipment, enable All.
Step 4

When you are ready to print, click OK. The messages


will be printed.

Step 5

Repeat these steps to print messages for other equipment.

11-23

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Customizing the View


The default External Message Editor window displays the edited
summary in the left column and two equipment lists in the center and
right columns.
You can change the order in which the lists appear, change the
number of panes in the window, adjust column width and modify the
font size.
Icon Bar
The icons in the Icon Bar can be relocated anywhere on the screen by
doing the following:

11-24

Step 1

Click and hold the mouse button down on the gray border
surrounding an icon or group of icons.

Step 2

Drag the icon or group of icons to a different area on the


screen and release the mouse button.

Step 3

To restore the icons to their original location, select View


and Set default view from the menu.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Order of Appearance
If you have more than two equipments of the same type, or want to
display the original summary (the default factory commands), you
can change the order of appearance by doing the following:
Step 1

Move the cursor to the column you want to change.

Step 2

Select Option and Change Equipment from the menu,


type Alt+c or click the header bar at the top of the column.
The Change Equipment window will appear:
Column header

Step 3

Select a new equipment or summary type from the list and


click OK. The column will change to the new list.

11-25

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Number of Panes
You can change the number of panes that appear in the External
Message Editor window. The default setting is three panes. To change
the number of panes, do the following:
Step 1

To change the window to a single pane,


Select Option, Panes and One from the main
menu, or
Type Alt+1
A single column will be displayed as shown in the
following example:

You can change what appears in the column by following


the steps under Order of Appearance on page 11-25.
To change to two or back to three panes, repeat Step 1 and
select the appropriate number. (The keyboard shortcuts are
Alt+2 for two panes, and Alt+3 for three panes.)

11-26

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Width of Columns
To adjust the width of the columns, do the following:
Step 1

Click on the vertical bar separating the columns. The cursor


will change to
. Drag the vertical bar while holding
down the mouse button to resize the column.

Step 2

To return the column to its default size, select Option and


Columns Align from the menu, or type Alt+g.

Appearance of Text
You can change the font in the columns to make the messages easier
to read by doing the following:
Step 1

Select Option and Message Font from the menu or type


Alt+t. The Font window will appear:

Step 2

Select a new font, style or size. The Sample view in the


Font window displays the selected font. Click OK to
apply the changes.

11-27

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Programming
DVA Equipment

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Setting DVA Parameters


The DVA System option in the Message Editor menu allows you to
set operation parameters for Digital VersaT1lity Alarm (DVA) remote
equipment that is part of the FarScan-controlled network. These
parameters include the following:
Input polarity and debounce period (refer to Setting Input
Parameters on page 11-32).
Output control delay and pulse duration (refer to Setting Relay
Output Parameters on page 11-35).
Analog scaling factor and range limits (refer to Setting Analog
Input Parameters on page 11-38).
Programmable Alarm Indicator (PAI) equations (refer to
Programmable Alarm Indicators on page 11-43).
These parameters are internal to, and exclusively for, DVA
equipment.
Refer to the DVA instruction manual for information on the
installation, alignment, operation and maintenance of DVA
equipment.
TE
NO

An understanding of your communication system organization and


objectives, and some knowledge of Boolean algebra is required to
carry out the following procedures. If you need assistance, contact
Customer Service (see page 1-3).

11-28

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Copying DVA Parameter Settings


It is easy to copy the settings from one DVA monitor/control group to
another. After you have made changes to one group, you can copy all
changes, or specific ones, to another group by doing the following:
Step 1

Save the changes. (Click


from the menu.)

Step 2

Click
or select Edit and Copy from the menu. The
Copy DVA Parameters window will appear:

Step 3

Click the small plus sign (+) to expand the group you want
to copy the parameters from.

or select File and Save

If you just want to copy settings for one pin, keep


expanding the choices until the eight pins are displayed.
Step 4

Highlight the item you want to copy the parameters from


and click Copy.

Step 5

Expand the next group and highlight the item you want to
copy the parameters to. Click Paste.

11-29

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

For example, if you copied the DVA Input parameters from


Group 1, paste them to the DVA Input parameters in Group
2.

11-30

Step 6

To set the changes as default, click Set Default. When


you have finished copying the parameters, click Done.

Step 7

Click
or select File and Save from the menu to
save the changes.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Printing DVA Parameters


You can print DVA parameters to a local printer. In order to do so,
you must have a dot-matrix or laser printer connected to the computer
where FarScan Utilities is loaded.
To print from FarScan Utilities, do the following:
Step 1

Open the DVA Parameters window you want to print


information from.

Step 2

Select File and Print from the menu, or click


Print window will appear:

Step 3

When you are ready to print, click OK. The data will be
printed.

. The

11-31

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Setting Input Parameters


Before you set the DVA input parameters, make sure you have done
the following:
Copied the database and parameter files to a temporary directory
(see page 11-5).
Loaded the correct database (see page 11-6).
Edited the messages (see page 11-17).
To set DVA input parameters, do the following:
Step 1

11-32

In FarScan Utilities, click the DVA parameters editor icon


, or select Editors and DVA parameters from the
menu. The DVA Parameters File Editor and DVA
Equipment Selection windows will appear:

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 2

FarScan for Windows

Select the DVA equipment to edit and click OK. The


equipment information will appear in the DVA Parameters
File Editor window:

Equipment
Message Field

Step 3

You can change the message text by clicking on the


Equipment Message field. The Edit Message window will
appear:

Type the new text and click OK. When you save the file,
the information will also appear in the Message Editor
database.
Step 4

Select the monitor/control group you want to edit by


clicking on one of the Group icons. For example, to set
parameters for monitor/control unit #2 inputs (Group 2)
click
.

11-33

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

TE
NO

Refer to the DVA manual for more information on inputs and input
groups.
Step 5

Select the condition by clicking Open alarm or Gnd


alarm for the set of four inputs.

Step 6

Enter the delays desired for the first set of four inputs.
Delay is in seconds (from 0.0 to 25.1 seconds) and can be
set in 0.1-second increments.

Step 7

Repeat Step 6 for the second set of four inputs.

Step 8

Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until parameters for all eight sets (if
equipped) are entered.

Step 9

Click
or select File and Save from the menu to
save the changes.

Step 10 If necessary, repeat this procedure for the other two


monitor/control groups.
TE
NO

You can copy parameters from one group to another by using the
copy function described in Copying DVA Parameter Settings on
page 11-29.

11-34

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Setting Relay Output Parameters


Before you set the DVA relay output parameters, make sure you have
done the following:
Copied the database and parameter files to a temporary directory
(see page 11-5).
Loaded the correct database (see page 11-6).
Edited the messages (see page 11-17).
To set DVA relay output parameters, do the following:
Step 1

In FarScan Utilities, click the DVA parameters editor icon


, or select Editors and DVA parameters from the
menu. The DVA Parameters File Editor and DVA
Equipment Selection windows will appear:

Step 2

Select the DVA equipment to edit and click OK.

11-35

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Step 3

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Click the DVA Output icon


or select DVA
Parameters and Output from the DVA Parameters File
Editor menu. The output parameters window will appear:

Equipment
Message Field

Step 4

You can change the message text by clicking on the


Equipment Message field. The Edit Message window will
appear:

Type the new text and click OK. When you save the file,
the information will also appear in the Message Editor
database.

11-36

Step 5

Select the monitor/control group you want to edit by


clicking on one of the Group icons. For example, to set
parameters for monitor/control unit #2 inputs (Group 2)
click
.

Step 6

Click on the relay number you want to edit.

Step 7

Enter the delay and duration desired for each group of eight
relays. All relays can be assigned a delayed action of 0.0 to
25.1 seconds.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

A duration of 0.0 seconds creates a latching relay, while a


duration between 0.1 and 25.1 seconds creates a pulsing
relay.
The graphical display in the left portion of the screen will
be modified to reflect the changes you entered.
Step 8

Save the changes. To do this, click


Save from the menu.

Step 9

Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for other relays or relay groups.

or select File and

TE
O

You can copy parameters from one group to another or from one relay
to another by using the copy function described in Copying DVA
Parameter Settings on page 11-29.

11-37

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Setting Analog Input Parameters


Before you set the DVA analog input parameters, make sure you have
done the following:
Copied the database and parameter files to a temporary directory
(see page 11-5).
Loaded the correct database (see page 11-6).
Edited the messages (see page 11-17).
To set DVA analog input parameters, do the following:

11-38

Step 1

In FarScan Utilities, click the DVA parameters editor icon


, or select Editors and DVA parameters from the
menu. The DVA Parameters File Editor and DVA
Equipment Selection windows will appear:

Step 2

Select the DVA equipment to edit and click OK.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 3

FarScan for Windows

Click the DVA Analog input icon


or select DVA
Parameters and Analog from the DVA Parameters File
Editor menu. The analog parameters window will appear:

Equipment
Message Field

Step 4

You can change the message text by clicking on the


Equipment Message field. The Edit Message window will
appear:

Type the new text and click OK. When you save the file,
the information will also appear in the Message Editor
database.
Step 5

Select the monitor/control group you want to edit by


clicking on one of the Group icons. For example, to set
parameters for monitor/control unit #2 inputs (Group 2)
click
.

Step 6

Click on the analog relay number you want to edit.

11-39

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Step 7

Enter the Full Scale, Upper Limits, Lower Limits and Bias
Reading parameters for each analog input connected to
your system.
The upper and lower limits can be defined so that when
limits are reached, a system alarm with the time stamp is
logged.
Full Scale is the maximum range of the input; default DVA
straps are 5, 30 and 60 volts.
Bias Reading is used for transducers that do not go to 0
(zero). This is the displayed value for no input.

TE
NO

The DVA Analog Inputs function can be used to monitor voltage or


temperature. For an example of how to set up voltage monitoring,
refer to Example for Setting Values. For an example of how to set
up temperature monitoring, refer to Example for Setting
Temperature Values on page 11-41.
Example for Setting Values
The procedure in this section describes how to set values for a
pressure gauge thats connected to Group 1, Relay 1 (C1+,D1-). For
example, if 2V = 0 PSI, 5V = 40 PSI, SAFE is between 26 and 34
PSI, do the following:
Step 1

Enter these parameters:


Full Scale - 5.0
Upper Limit - 4.55
Lower Limit - 3.45
Bias Reading - 2.0

11-40

Step 2

Set the range to 5V. (Click the 5V in the bottom left


corner of the window.)

Step 3

Save the changes (click

).

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

You will notice that the entered values changed somewhat.


(For example, the Upper Limit parameter of 4.55 changed
to 4.55294). Refer to Input 1 in the following window:

The reason for the change is that the entered values are
automatically divided into a scale of 255 equal increments
for accuracy.
Example for Setting Temperature Values
If a temperature monitoring device is wired to the pins in Group 1,
Input C3+,D3- of the DVA, you can set the analog inputs to send an
alarm to FarScan if the room temperature is over or under range for
proper equipment operation.
For example, the MegaStar radios operation temperature range is
30F to 122F (0C to 32C).
Use this value: 1V equals 90
Step 1

Find the Full Scale parameter. If 1V equals 90, multiply


90 by 5V. The product is 450. Enter 450 in the Full Scale
parameter field.

Step 2

Enter the following parameters:


Upper Limit - 122
Lower Limit - 30
Bias Reading - 0

11-41

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

11-42

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Step 3

Set the range to 5V. (Click the 5V in the bottom left


corner of the window.)

Step 4

Save the changes (click

).

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Programmable Alarm Indicators


The variables used in boolean equations are logical operators that
have a TRUE value when indicating an alarm condition and a FALSE
value when indicating a normal condition.
Upper and lower analog limits, when exceeded (such as overrange
and underrange), will cause their corresponding variable to assume a
TRUE value.
A PAI equation may be written to occupy several lines. However, the
total number of variables, operators, and symbols in the equation
must not exceed 500.
Setting PAI Logical Equations
Before you set Programmable Alarm Indicator (PAI) logical
equations, you will need to know the following:
How many PIO cards are installed in the computer (see application
note # 3 on page 14-9).
What items are connected to the DVAs back panel relays.
How to write boolean equations.
Step 1

Load the database and equipment files you want to edit.


(Refer to page 11-6.)

Step 2

In the FarScan Utilities main window, click


or select
Editors and DVA parameters from the menu. The DVA
Parameters File Editor window will appear.

11-43

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

If you have more than one DVA in your network, the DVA
Equipment selection window will appear on top:

11-44

Step 3

Select the DVA to edit and click OK.

Step 4

Click
or select DVA Parameters and PAI from the
menu. The PAI window will appear:

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

In this window, you can enter logical equations for alarm


indicators PAI1 through PAI18.
For a detailed information on how to write logical
equations, refer to Example for Reporting Imminent
Battery Failure on page 11-46.
Step 5

Enter the boolean equation for PAI1 and press Return.


Use the Delete and Backspace keys to edit your entry.
You may use more than one line for each PAI equation.

Step 6

Repeat Step 5 until all equations (for PAI1 through PAI8)


are done.

PAI Boolean Equation Operators


The following operators are used in writing boolean equations:
*

(asterisk) represents the logical AND.

(plus sign) represents the logical OR.

(caret) represents the logical NOT.

()

(parentheses) used for nesting terms, expressions and


equations.

<

(lesser-than symbol) used to mark the end of an equation.

All equations must start with an open parenthesis and end with a close
parentheses followed by the lesser-than symbol. The example given
in Example for Reporting Imminent Battery Failure on page 11-46
gives more specific details.
Programmable Alarm Indicator (PAI) Definitions
PAI 1

Alarmed DVA units Local Minor Alarm. Causes a System


Minor Alarm on other VersaT1lity units.

PAI 2

Appears in AutoPolls Summary Display.

PAI 3

General indicator.

PAI 4

General indicator.

PAIs 5 through 8 can be optionally strapped to energize the DVA


units local external relays. (Refer to information on the
Protection/Alarm unit in the DVA manual.)

11-45

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Example for Reporting Imminent Battery Failure


This example describes step-by-step how to create a Minor Alarm
that reports to FarScan when the battery power supply is about to fail.

TE
O

The steps in this example are for demonstration purposes only, and
may not apply to your equipment configuration.

11-46

Step 1

Group 1, C1+,D1- Custom Analog Value was strapped for


analog inputs connected to the battery.

Step 2

In the DVA Analog Input Parameters menu, the voltage


limits were set to 60.0 (full scale), 53.0 (upper limit), 43.0
(lower limit) and 0.0 (bias reading).

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 3

Group 1, C2+,D2- was connected to the same battery with


new limits of 60.0 (full scale), 50.0 (upper limit), 46.0
(lower limit) and 0.0 (bias reading).

Step 4

Also, Group 1 B8 is connected to detect if the battery


charger is ON.

11-47

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Step 5

The equation to create the Minor Alarm for FarScan is:


Prog. Alarm Ind. #1 ON
((D1*B8)+(C1*^B8))<
In plain text, this equation is telling the system to:
D1

B8

Alarm if ((battery over range and charger on)


+

C1

B8

or if (battery low and charger not on))<


Example for Activating a Backup Generator
For this example, the following connections have been made:
A generator is connected to Group 1, Relay 3
Input B1 is connected to Generator Low Fuel (C1, low battery
range)
A backup generator is connected to PAI 7
An equation must be written to activate the backup generator when
the above indicators are turned on.

Here is the equation:


Prog. Alarm Ind. #7 ON
(C1*^B8)<
In plain text, this equation is telling the system to:
C1

B8

Energize if (battery under range and no charger is on)<

11-48

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Resetting DVA
Equipment

FarScan for Windows

After the FarScan messages have been modified and DVA parameters
have been entered, update FarScan and the DVA firmware with the
new information. To do this, do the following:
Step 1

Close FarScan Utility.

Step 2

Copy the files in the temporary directory to the FarScan for


Windows directory (see page 11-5).

TE
NO

If you renamed the files in the procedure on page 11-5, return them to
their original names.
Step 3

Start FarScan for Windows and turn the connection online


(refer to Chapter 4, Starting and Connecting FarScan).

Step 4

Make sure the correct database files are loaded. (See


Loading a Database on page 6-3.)

Step 5

Set up a log file. (See Enabling the Log Mode on page 76.)

Step 6

Enable the Edited Messages feature of FarScan by clicking


on the Edited Messages icon. It will change from
to
.

Step 7

Reset the DVA equipment. To do this, send command 890,


DVA Reset Command.

STOP

If relay controls have already been set, sending command 890 will
reset the entire DVA, including the relay controls.

11-49

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Step 8

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Enable Update when requested in AutoPoll and start


AutoPoll in master AutoPoll mode. Any parameter changes
for the DVA will be transferred at this time.
If Update when requested is not enabled in AutoPoll, an
active symbol (flame) will appear in the Summary Display
with the message, Update requested. To clear the flame,
simply enable Update when requested.

STOP

Only one master FarScan computer running master AutoPoll should


update the DVA at a time.

DVA Real Time Stamping


The DVA system will report 255 changes of state and up to four
minutes of those changes of state to the master FarScan computer
running master AutoPoll.
Command 071, Status/Time Stamping Latched, is a master AutoPoll
command that time-stamps the response with the actual time an input
went into alarm (which may be different from when FarScan
interrogated it). Refer to the following window:

11-50

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

This page intentionally blank.

11-51

Chapter 11: FarScan Utilities

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

11-52

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

CHAPTER 12

FarScan Pager

Chapter
Contents

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Provides an overview of the FarScan Pager.

Configuring Zones and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4


Describes how to set up zones and locations for paging.

Setting Up the Personnel File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9


Describes how to set up the personnel pager file.

Setting Up Paging Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13


Defines the types of paging: ASCII (text), tone and direct
notification port.

Assigning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14


Describes how to select FarScan responses for reporting to the
pager.

Configuring the Pager System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16


Describes how to set the pagers configuration parameters.

Acknowledging a Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19


Describes how to acknowledge a page after it is received.

12-1

Chapter 12: FarScan Pager

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

12-2

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Introduction

FarScan for Windows

The FarScan Pager provides for automatic paging of designated


service personnel upon the occurrence of defined equipment alarms in
the network.
The network is divided into Zones for paging purposes. Each Zone
includes a specified number of Locations which are assigned Names.
A certain number of Equipment is assigned to each Location. The
FarScan messages for each Equipment are identified and tagged for
the Pager system.
A Personnel File is also created. The Personnel File lists the service
personnel or staff that may be paged upon the occurrence of a
specified equipment alarm. Each person is assigned a priority
number. For example, when two or more people are assigned to a
Zone, one may be paged before the other.
The entire Paging system may be enabled or disabled globally.
The following procedures show how to set up the FarScan Pager
system and how to modify any of the setup parameters.

12-3

Chapter 12: FarScan Pager

Configuring
Zones and
Locations

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

The microwave network must be divided into Zones. Each Zone can
be divided into a number of Locations. Each Location may include a
number of Equipments (up to the maximum allowable for the
FarScan version you are using).
Paging is enabled or disabled for individual Zones, Locations,
Equipment and Personnel. For example, if paging for one Location
within a Zone is disabled, alarms for Equipments contained in that
Location will not be reported to the pager.

Create Equipment Locations

12-4

Step 1

Select Utilities and Equipment File Editor from the


main menu, or press F5. The Equipment File Editor
window will appear:

Step 2

In the Equipment File Editor window, click Location. The


Location window will appear:

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 3

Click Create. The Create Equipment Locations window


will appear:

Step 4

Enter the total number of Equipment Locations and click


Ok.

TE
O

You can add to the number of locations by using the Append feature,
described in step Step 11.
Step 5

Double-click a location or highlight it and click Edit. The


Location and Zone Editor window will appear:

Step 6

Type an identifying Location Name.

Step 7

Assign a Zone Number.

TE
NO

Several locations can be included in one zone. To assign multiple


locations to a zone, enter the same zone number when editing each
location.
Step 8

Make sure paging is Enabled. Click Ok.

12-5

Chapter 12: FarScan Pager

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

TE
NO

This option enables paging for the Location.


Step 9

Highlight the next location to create and double-click it or


click Create.

Step 10 Repeat steps 1 through 9 for the next location to edit.


Step 11 To add a location, click Append in the Location window.
Edit the information in the Location & Zone Editor window
and click Ok. The new location will be added to the list,
and the Total # of Locations will be increased.
Step 12 When all the locations have been edited, click Close.
Step 13 Save the file. Click Save As and follow the prompts that
appear.

Select Equipment Locations


Step 1

12-6

Select Utilities and Equipment File Editor from the


main menu, or press F5. The Equipment File Editor
window will appear:

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 2

Click Create. The Equipment File Create window will


appear.

Step 3

Enter the total number of equipment locations. Press Enter


or click Ok.

Edit Equipment Locations


For each equipment in the list, do the following:
Step 1

In the Equipment File Editor window, highlight an


equipment and click Edit (or, double-click the equipment).
The Equipment Editor window will appear:

Step 2

To change the equipment name, type over the existing one


in the Name field.

Step 3

To change the Hardware Address, type the new one in the


corresponding field.

Step 4

To change the equipment Type, click the down arrow and


select the new type.

Step 5

To change the Location, click the down arrow and select


the new one.

Step 6

Select the status for AutoPoll (enabled or disabled),


Connection (direct or indirect) or Paging (enabled or
disabled).

12-7

Chapter 12: FarScan Pager

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

TE
NO

If paging is disabled for a specific equipment, its alarms will not be


reported to the pager.

12-8

Step 7

Click Ok to apply the changes.

Step 8

Save the file. Click Save As... and type in the new file
name. (Make sure it has an .eqw extension.) Set the file as
default.

Step 9

Continue with Setting Up the Personnel File.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Setting Up the
Personnel File

FarScan for Windows

Select the Persons Name


Step 1

Click
, or select Utilities and Personnel File
Editor from the main menu. The Personnel File Editor
window will appear:

Step 2

Click Append. In the window that appears, type in the


name of the new person. Click Ok.

Step 3

In the Personnel File Editor window, enable Active


Person.

Step 4

Enter the pager company information and numbers.

STOP

To ensure that the modem pauses long enough for a connection before
sending alarm information to the pager, enter a series of commas after
the pager number. One comma creates a two-second pause; four
commas are recommended. Example: 555-1212,,,,
Step 5

Select the paging type. Details of each type are given in


Setting Up Paging Types on page 12-13.

12-9

Chapter 12: FarScan Pager

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

If you select ASCII Pager or Direct Notification, the


Activity button will be enabled. Click the button and select
the equipment activity to be reported:

Step 6

Select the working hours. These are the hours during which
the person will receive the page. To change a time period,
click on the gray button below the weekday and enter the
new information.

Step 7

Repeat steps 2 through 6 to add another person.

Step 8

Click Save As to save the changes. Follow the prompts


that appear and set the file as default.

Assign Paging Priority


Step 1

12-10

To assign paging priority to each person, click Zones in the


Personnel File Editor window. The Zone Allocation
window will appear:

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 2

Click on a persons name in the Zone column and rightclick with the mouse. A list of priorities will pop up:

Step 3

Drag the mouse down to select a priority. Priority 1 means


the person will be paged first for the zone, Priority 2 means
they will be paged second, etc.

Step 4

Release the mouse. A number will appear in the Zone


column that indicates what priority was selected.

Step 5

Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other names and zones in the
list.

TE
NO

You can select active or inactive paging status in the Zone window by
right-clicking the name or zone number with the mouse. In the popup
list that appears, select Active or Inactive. (A checkmark next to an
item indicates the current selection.)

TE
O

The text color indicates a persons paging status. Green means the
person is enabled for paging, red means the person is disabled from
being paged.
Step 6

After the changes have been made, close the Zone window
and click Save As to save the file. Follow the prompts that
appear.

12-11

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 12: FarScan Pager

Change Zone Colors


You can change the colors assigned to paging zones. To do so, select
Options and Colors from the Zone Allocation windows menu. You
can make changes in the Colors window that appears.

Delete a Person From the File


If you want to delete a person from the file, do the following:

12-12

Step 1

Select the persons name in the Personnel File Editor


window.

Step 2

Click Delete.

Step 3

Click Save As and save the file. Follow the prompts that
appear.

Step 4

Click Close to exit the Personnel File Editor.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Setting Up
Paging Types

FarScan for Windows

ASCII (Text) Paging


For ASCII (text) paging, the following information will be needed:
Persons Name
Paging Company Number
Pager ID
When a text pager receives a page from FarScan, the display will
show the equipment number, equipment address and trouble ticket
describing the alarm.

Tone Paging
To select Tone Paging, the following information is needed:
Persons Name
Pager Number
On pagers without the ASCII paging feature, only the equipment
number and address will be displayed.

Direct Notification
Select Direct Notification. A device name is needed for this function,
and a dedicated COM port must be configured.

12-13

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 12: FarScan Pager

Assigning
Messages

To define which equipment alarms are reported to the pager, do the


following:
Step 1

Select Utilities and Message Assignment from the


main menu. The Message Assignment window appears:

Message Assignment window options include the


following.

File
Save
Print...
Close
Edit
Select All
Clear All

You can use the Edit function on the menu bar


to Select All and Clear All the messages for all
the equipment.

Options
Colors...
Save Setup
Help

Step 2

Click on an equipment number in the window. A list of all


possible AutoPOLL messages for that equipment type
appears in the window. Equipment numbers are green if the
equipment has been defined and are of the same type.
See the following table for an explanation of the different
colors for the equipment numbers.

12-14

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Equipment No.
Gray
Green
Red

FarScan for Windows

Explanation
Paging status is disabled for that equipment. (To
Enable/Disable an equipment, refer to Editing a
File in Chapter 6.)
Equipment has been defined.
Equipment is unknown and cannot be selected for
paging.

Step 3

Clicking the right mouse button on a green Equipment


number displays Edit option for that column. See the
following example.

Step 4

You can Select All or Clear All for that column. Or you can
click on a space. An X appears to indicate the equipment
has been selected for paging. Clicking on an X removes
the X.
A message with an X indicates that for that equipment,
should an alarm occur, a page will be sent to the person (if
enable for paging) assigned to the zone in which the
equipment is located.

Step 5

If required, complete the equipment assignment by clicking


and placing Xs on as many messages as desired for the
paging system.

Step 6

Save the changes to the file by clicking File and then Save.

Step 7

Click Close in the File menu.

12-15

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 12: FarScan Pager

Configuring the
Pager System

Step 1

Select Configuration and Pager System Configuration


from the main menu. The Pager System Configuration
window will appear:

The Pager System Configuration window allows you to set


paging parameters.

!
These parameters must be set before the paging system is
turned on or enabled.
Step 2

Configure the Pager as follows:


[a] Global Paging On/Off. Turn paging on or off by
clicking Global Paging On or Global Paging Off.
On will enable paging globally, Off will disable
paging.
[b] Alarm Validation. Set the time that the Pager will wait
before it takes action on that new alarm. (This can
eliminate intermittent alarms.) Click the up or down
arrow to change the time in minutes.

TE
O

The alarm must be present for this minimum amount of time in order
for the pager to take action on it. If the alarm goes away before the
alarm validation period, FarScan will not trigger paging.

12-16

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

[c] Delay Between Pages in Minutes. Set the time the


Pager will wait before it pages the designated person
again on the same alarm. Click the up or down arrow to
change the time in minutes.
[d] Attempts before the Next Person is Paged. Select the
number of times the Pager will page the current person
before moving on to the next person in priority. Click
the up or down arrow to change the number of paging
attempts.
[e] Pager System Port Setup. If a person has ASCII or
tone paging, enable this port. Click Pager System and
select the COM port, then select the baud rate. Click
OK.
[f] Direct Notification Port Setup. If a device has been
assigned Direct Notification paging, enable this port.
Click Direct Notification and select the COM port, then
select the baud rate. Click OK.
[g] Pager Log File. Enter the path and name of the log file
to which paging history will be written. The Pager will
write paging activity and information to this file. To
turn it on, select Enable.
Step 8

Click Apply in the Pager System Configuration window to


apply the changes.

12-17

Chapter 12: FarScan Pager

Step 9

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

To view paging activity (the information sent to the pager),


click Paging Activities. When a message is sent to the
pager, text will appear in the bottom portion of the window:

Step 10 Click Close to exit pager system configuration. To abort


the session and lose any changes, click Cancel. Click Help
for Pager online help.

12-18

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Acknowledging
a Page

FarScan for Windows

When you are paged by FarScan, a message will appear on the pager,
giving the equipment number and address. The following example
shows 001-014. 001 is the FarScan equipment number and 014 is the
address of the alarmed equipment.

If the pager is an ASCII (text) pager and can display multiple lines of
text, a trouble ticket for the alarm will also be displayed, as shown in
the following photo:

TE
NO

FarScan will continue paging until the page is acknowledged.

12-19

Chapter 12: FarScan Pager

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

To Acknowledge a Page

12-20

Step 1

Using the FarScan computer, log in to the FarScan radio


network.

Step 2

Select Operation and Pager Confirmation from the


main menu. The following window will appear:

Step 3

Select the equipment to acknowledge the page for. (To


select a group, highlight the first equipment, hold the Shift
key, and highlight the last item in the group.)

Step 4

Click Send. This broadcast message will acknowledge the


alarm that was issued at the specified alarmed equipment.
This will prevent FarScan from paging until a new alarm is
issued or a change of state takes place

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

This page intentionally blank.

12-21

Chapter 12: FarScan Pager

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

12-22

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

CHAPTER 13

FarScan SNMP

Chapter
Contents

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Provides an overview of FarScan SNMP.

SNMP Service Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4


Describes how to configure the SNMP service.

Enabling SNMP Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10


Describes how to enable the SNMP service.

13-1

Chapter 13: FarScan SNMP

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

13-2

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Introduction

FarScan for Windows

SNMP (simple network management protocol) is a plug-in tool that


works with FarScan to provide proxy agent functionality. It provides
the operator with the ability to assign IP addresses to equipment
presented in the FarScan equipment list. SNMP commands can then
be sent to the equipment through the use of the assigned IP addresses.
The conversion from an SNMP request, command, or trap to a SCAN
command or vice versa is automatically completed by the SNMP
services. Any SNMP manager can send SNMP messages to the
FarScan controlled equipment through the use of MIB-defined SNMP
objects.
When the SNMP plug-in is installed, an icon appears in the menu bar
of the main FarScan window.
SNMP service is not running
SNMP service is disabled
SNMP service is running

13-3

Chapter 13: FarScan SNMP

SNMP Service
Configuration

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

The SNMP Service Configuration window enables you to configure


an SNMP agent. It saves the configuration upon exit, and restores the
saved information when it is launched again.
Step 1

Select Configuration and SNMP Configuration from


the main menu.

Step 2

The SNMP Service Configuration window will appear with


the Address Association tab displayed first.

Continue with the following procedures to configure SNMP service.

Address Association
The Address Association function enables you to assign IP addresses
to radio equipment.

13-4

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

The left pane of the window (Equipment) displays a list of


equipment in the FarScan equipment file that is SNMP-compatible.
The right pane of the Address Association window (Available IP
Addresses) displays a list of IP addresses available on a given PC to
be assigned to the equipments.
In order for the file to be SNMP compatible, the loaded FarScan
database needs to contain an MIB file for a given product type, as
well as SCAN to MIB mapping scripts.

TE
O

If the FarScan database does not have MIB and mapping scripts for a
certain equipment type, none of the equipments of this type in the
loaded FarScan equipment file will appear.
Adding IP Addresses
TE
NO

Contact the network administrator to obtain valid IP addresses to be


added to the FarScan SNMP.
To add IP addresses, do the following:
Step 1

In the Address Association window, click Add. The


following window will appear:

Step 2

Select the network adapter to add the IP address to.

Step 3

Type in the new IP address and subnet mask. Click Add.


New IP addresses will be added to the list of available
addresses.

13-5

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 13: FarScan SNMP

Click Cancel to close the window without saving any


changes.
Step 4

Reboot the computer now.

STOP

Failure to reboot can cause the PCs IP addresses to be improperly


configured.
Assigning IP Addresses
Assign a different IP address to each equipment to be accessed
through SNMP. To assign an IP address, do the following:
Step 1

Click on the equipment in the left pane to highlight it.

Step 2

Select the desired address in the right pane. Click Assign.


The selected IP address will move to the selected
equipment in the left pane.

Step 3

Click Apply or OK to save the changes. To discard the


changes, click Cancel.

To unassign an IP address, select the equipment and click Unassign.


Removing IP Addresses
To remove an IP address from the list of available IP addresses, do the
following:
Step 1

In the Address Association window, highlight the IP


address to be removed. Click Remove.

Step 2

Reboot the computer.

Editing IP Addresses/Subnet Masks


To change an IP address or subnet mask, do the following:

13-6

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Step 1

In the Address Association window, highlight the IP


address to be edited. Click Edit. The following window
will appear:

Step 2

Edit the IP address and/or subnet mask and click Add.

Step 3

Reboot the computer.

Managers
The Managers tab enables the user to configure two lists of SNMP
managers, which will have rights to monitor the equipment.

The left pane of the window (Allowed Managers) displays the IP


addresses of SNMP managers, which are allowed to send SNMP
requests to equipment. If FarScan SNMP receives a request from an
IP address which is not in the list, the request will be silently
discarded. No SNMP response will be provided.
The right pane (Trap Destination) displays a list of SNMP manager IP
addresses that FarScan SNMP will send SNMP trap requests to.
When a Trap condition occurs, the Trap request will be sent to all IP
addresses in the list.

13-7

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 13: FarScan SNMP

Adding an IP Address
To add an IP address to the manager list, do the following:
Step 1

In the Manager window, type the new number in the New


IP Address field (in the left pane). Click Add.

Removing an IP Address
Step 1

To remove an IP address from the list, highlight it and click


Remove.

TE
NO

The current version of SNMP services sends a Trap to each IP address


in the list only once. Repeat Trap sending is not supported.

Community
The Community tab enables you to configure community parameters
for secure SNMP transactions. Only requests with the correct
community name will be accepted.

TE
NO

Entries for the community fields should be text strings.

13-8

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Defining the Community


To set up the community, do the following:
Step 1

Specify the community for Write action (SNMP Set).

Step 2

Specify the community for Read action (SNMP Get).

Step 3

Specify the community for the Trap Destination. This will


be used when the trap request is sent.

Step 4

Click Ok.

13-9

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Enabling SNMP
Services

FarScan for Windows

To enable SNMP services in FarScan, do the following:


Step 1

Make sure the SNMP equipment has been assigned an IP


address. (Refer to page 12-4.)

Step 1

Click on the SNMP icon. It will change from not running


to enabled
.

13-10

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

CHAPTER 14

Application Notes

Chapter
Contents

Application Note #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3


Requirements for a Loop-Protected System

Application Note #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7


Multiple-Site Master Systems Using All-Hardwire
Connections

Application Note #3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9


Recommendations on Alarm Relay Kits

Application Note #4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19


Programmable External Control Relays (DVA Systems)

Application Note #5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21


Multiple-Site Master Systems Using Modems or Data
Channels

Application Note #6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23


Statistical Information Reporting

Application Note #7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-35


DCE-to-DCE and DTE-to-DTE Ports and Cable Pin
Configurations

Application Note #8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37


Connecting a FarScan Computer to the GlobeStar Radio

Application Note #9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-39


Hayes Optima 24 Modem

Application Note #10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-41


Hayes ACCURA 288 Modem

Application Note #11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-43


Intel 144/144e Modem

14-1

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Application Note #12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-45


Connecting a FarScan Terminal to the MicroStar Radio

Application Note #13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47


FarScan Master Equipment Number

Application Note #14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48


Connecting a FarScan Terminal to the Constellation Radio

14-2

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Application
Note #1

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Requirements for a Loop-Protected System


Step 1

In a loop-protected system, the address of VersaT1lity


equipment connected to the FarScan computer must be 1
or 001.
To verify the VersaT1lity address, press the AUTO key on
the VersaT1lity keyboard or keypad (while the VersaT1lity
SCAN system is operating in the automatic mode). The
display should show #001 or SITE # 001.

TE
O

Do not use the VersaT1lity equipment keypad at the equipment where


FarScan is connected while AutoPoll or SelectPoll is running. This
can cause erroneous alarms and messages in FarScan.

Step 2

14-3

Set the FarScan computer to Master Site 0.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Requirement for a Loop-Protected System


with Spurs
When FarScan is used in a loop-protected system that has one or
more spurs, the Master Site must be part of the loop and not in a spur.
In other words, the FarScan computer can be connected to any
VersaT1lity site in the loop but not to a site in a spur. See
Figure 13-1.
Notes:
1. The internal communication rate (for the SCAN channel) must be
either 9600 b/s or 19.2 kb/s.
2. AutoPoll must be running in FarScan for the proper operation of a
VersaT1lity keypad at a spur site to another site via the SCAN
channel. This prevents keypad messages from circulating
endlessly around the loop and overloading the SCAN channel,
causing a communication timeout and other error messages.
End of note.

14-4

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Figure 13-1

14-5

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Example of a loop-protected system, showing spurs

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

This page intentionally blank.

14-6

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Application
Note #2

Multiple-Site Master Systems Using


All-Hardwire Connections
TE
NO

For multiple-site master system communication using modems or


data channels, see Application Note #5.
Installation procedure for:
3-master-site connector kit (p/n 099-108432-002) and
6-master-site connector kit (p/n 099-108432-004)
It is sometimes desirable to run one FarScan computer to control
systems that are not connected to each other. An example would be
two independent backbones or a backbone with unrelated hops. In
this event, the following must be done (see Figure 13-2):
Step 1

Order the 3-master-site connector kit (099-108432-002) or


6-master-site connector kit (099-108432-004) from Harris.

Step 2

Set the FarScan Master Site number to 0 (zero).

Step 3

Set one hardware Master Site to address 1, and all other


sites to unique addresses.

Step 4

Using cables 087-108431-300 and 087-108429-006,


connect the FarScan computer to the MASTER port on the
Distribution Box (see Figure 13-2).

Step 5

Using cable 087-108431-300, connect the Master Site from


each network to one of the RS-232C ports (labeled Port 1,
2, and 3) on the Distribution Box.

End of note.

14-7

Illustration of Connections to the Distribution Box

14-8

FarScan for Windows

Note: There is no SCAN connections between Networks A and B, i. e., it is not possible to interrogate
a site on one network by using the keypad or a laptop running FarScan on the other network.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Figure 13-2

087-108431-300

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Application
Note #3

Recommendations on Alarm Relay Kits


External Alarm Relay Kit
The External Alarm Relay Kit (see item 4 for recommended vendor
and component part numbers) includes the following:
Field-installable Relay Expansion Card that plugs into one of the
FarScan computers expansion slots
37-pin D-type connectorized ribbon cable
Relay Box equipped with 8 Form C relays
Installation and connection instructions
Please note the following installation considerations:
1. The recommended I/O address for the Relay Expansion Card is
00330H as shown in the manufacturers manual.
2. The ribbon cable supplied with the kit provides three sets of
8-line data buses labeled A (PA0-PA7), B (PB0-PB7), and C
(PC0-PC7). FarScan controls these buses in two ways:
[a] Momentary Alarms Mode
This mode is set in the System Configuration & Display
menu by selecting the Momentary Alarms option.
The alarmed sites address is at Port A (PA0-PA7), the alarm
information is on one or more lines of Port B (PB0-PB7, see
Figure 13-3) and handshaking is done at Port C (PC0-PC7,
see Figure 13-4).
The user may create a display board with eight relays or
LEDs per site, for up to 255 sites. Latching of the alarms is
the users responsibility.
We recommend that PC2 be connected to enable data
(DATA ACTIVE) and PC3 be used as a clock (DATA
CLOCK) to input PA0-PA7 and PB0-PB7 into a latching (or
memory) hardware.
Figure 13-5 lists the signal assignments on the 37-pin D-type
connector.

14-9

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Figure 13-3

Port B Alarm Assignments

PB0

User-definable external input.

PB1

MAJOR ALARM (Relay #2).

PB2

User-definable external input.

PB3

MINOR ALARM (Relay #4).

PB4

User-definable external input.

PB5

DS1/DS2 DISAGREE (Relay #6).

PB6

User-definable external input.

PB7

Reserved (Relay #8).

Figure 13-4

FarScan for Windows

Timing Waveforms

14-10

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Figure 13-5

37-pin Connector Pin Assignments

[a] Latching Alarms Mode


This mode is set in the System Configuration & Display
menu by selecting the Latching Alarms option. The ribbon
cable supplied with the kit should be connected between the
Relay Expansion Card and the Relay Box. The power supply
dip switch in the Relay Box should be set for INTERNAL
power source (using the computers +5V supply).
In the Latching Alarms Mode, FarScan will not clear the Port
B lines when scanning the sites, so the panel behaves as a
System Summary Alarm reporter. To clear the alarms, press
Shift F6 on the computer.
The Latching Alarms Mode is intended for creating an
audible or visual alarm in noisy environments or for
activating remote alarms when the system is unattended.

14-11

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

3. The unused external inputs (PB0, PB2, PB4, and PB6; see Figure
13-3) are user-definable. These may be assigned to relays in the
Relay Box.
4. The recommended vendor for the External Alarm Relay Kit is
Keithley-MetraByte; the kit components and vendor part
numbers are: High-output Digital I/O Board, PIO-24;
Electromechanical Relay Board, ERA-01; and 37-conductor 18
Cable, C1800.

DS1/DS2 Relay
To clear the relay, do the following:
Step 1

Press Ctrl+F2.

Step 2

Press F4 and wait for two cycles of AutoPOLL to complete


before returning to your normal screens.

TE
NO

If a DS1/DS2 alarm is active and there are no other active alarm


conditions, a relay will clear when pressing F6. To activate the relay
again, perform Steps 1 and 2 above.

TE
NO

In the case of non-latch relays, relay #5 will pulse once.

14-12

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Relay
Expansion Card
and Relay Box

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

The Relay Expansion Card plugs into an expansion slot on the


FarScan Master (or Monitor) PC. A 37-pin D-type subminiature
connectorized cable assembly (R615G-5-ND) connects the Relay
Expansion Card to the Relay Box (see Figure 13-5 for pin
assignments). A dip switch (S1) on the Relay Card sets the
hexadecimal address of the card. When first shipped from the Factory,
the address is set to H0330 (816 decimal) as shown in Figure 13-6.
FarScan accesses and uses ports PB0 through PB7 to report alarm
information (in binary form). For example, PB1 (Binary 2) reports a
MINOR ALARM at the designated site.
FarScan uses ports PA0 through PA7 to designate the address (in
binary form) of the site for which the alarm is reported. For example,
when PA0 = 1 and PA1 through PA7 = 0, the address is Site 1; when
PA0 = 0, PA1 = 1, and PA2 through PA7 = 0, the address is Site 2, and
so on.
The Relay Box has eight or 24 relays and eight or 24 LEDs,
respectively, to indicate the state of the relays.
Each relay has a screw-type terminal block (COM/N.O./N.C.).
An LED lights to indicate an energized relay.
A dip switch selects an internal power source (PCs power supply) or
an external source. We recommend you use an external source to
protect the PCs power supply from overloads.

14-13

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

To Install the Relay Expansion Card and


Relay Box
Step 1

Set the address switch S1 as described above and install the


Relay Expansion Card (PIO-24) in one of the PCs
available expansion slots. Refer to the PCs installation
manual for installation details.

Step 2

Using the 37-pin D-type Connectorized Cable (R615G-5ND), connect the Relay Box (ERA-01, external) to the
Relay Expansion Card.

Step 3

Enter the FarScan System Configuration & Display Menu


and set the Alarm Panel options for Port Number
(recommended: H0330) and Momentary or Latching
software.

14-14

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Figure 13-6

14-15

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Relay Expansion Card and Relay Box Interconnection Information

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

External Relay
Kit Installation
Procedure

FarScan for Windows

General Information
There are two types of External Relay Kits that may be used in a
FarScan system: 24 Relay Kit and 8 Relay Kit. Installation
procedures are the same for either kit.

Installation Procedure
Step 1

Set the address on PIO card(s); recommended address is


H0300 (see PIO-96 Instruction Manual for address switch
settings).

Step 2

Insert the PIO card(s) into the FarScan computer.

Step 3

Connect the ribbon cable to the ERB card.

TE
O

If connecting more than one ERB card, the first card should be
connected to the lowest addressed PIO card J1 slot. This ERB card
will have the reserved relays on it. Relay 2-K2 (PB1 or CR1) is
connected to the System Major Alarm, Relay 4-K4 (PB3 or CR3) is
connected to the System Minor Alarm, and Relay 6-K6 (PB5 or CR5)
is connected to DS1/DS2 Disagree. If using an ERB 24-relay card,
reserved relays are Relay 1-K1 (CR0) and the above-mentioned
relays.
Step 4

Run the PIO diagnostic software (from a PIO diagnostic


diskette supplied with the relay kit). This diagnostic
software will activate the 24 relays on the ERB card.
[a] Place the PIO96/ERB24 diagnostic diskette into the
PCs floppy drive.
[b] Move to diskette and type PIO96ERB and then press
RETURN.
[c] When the software asks, enter the number of relay
cards to be tested.
[d] Enter 0 (zero) for no delay factor.

14-16

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 14: Application Notes

TE
NO

If a delay factor is desired, the recommended values are between 100


and 5000.
[e] Press the return key and validate that the relays are
working; LEDs next to Relay will turn on and off.
[f] Follow the programs instructions to exit.

Programming FarScan using the Message


Editor Utility
For detailed instructions on editing the messages with FarScan
Utility, refer to Chapter 11.

Setting PIO Addresses in FarScan


Running the PIO96/ERB24 diagnostic software will activate the
External Relay card.
End of note.

14-17

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

This page is intenionally blank.

14-18

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Application
Note #4

Programmable External Control Relays


(DVA Systems)
The Digital VersaT1lity Alarm (DVA) Remote assembly provides
four programmable alarm relay outputs at jack J12 on its shelf
motherboard (see the DVA instruction manual). These relay outputs
can be controlled by four external control commands (EXT CNTL 1
through EXT CNTL 4) or by four programmable alarm indication
commands (PAI 5 through PAI 8). Straps on the SD-107325-M2
Option 002 Protection/Alarm unit select the controls as follows:
FUNCTION

STRAP

For EXT CNTL operation


For PAI operation

2X IN
1X IN

Additional straps on the SD-107325-M2 Option 002 Protection/


Alarm unit configure the relay outputs per the following table.
Strap Options for DVA SD-107325-M2 Option 002 Protection/Alarm
Unit Alarm Relay Outputs 1
RELAY No.

Command

STRAP

PAI No.

STRAP

K1

EXT CMND 1

N1 = NO

M1 = NO

K2

EXT CMND 2

N2 = NO

M2 = NO

K4

EXT CMND 3

M5 = NO

N5 = NO

K3

EXT CMND 4

M3 = NO

N3 = NO

End of note.

1. NO = Normally-open (relay open for no alarm condition).

14-19

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

This page intentionally blank.

14-20

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Application
Note #5

Multiple-Site Master Systems Using Modems


or Data Channels
It is sometimes desirable to run one FarScan computer to control
systems that are not connected to each other and no digital
communication link is available. An example would be two
independent backbones or a backbone with unrelated hops. In this
event, the following must be done:
Step 1

Set the FarScan Master Site number to 0 (zero).

Step 2

Set one hardware Master Site to address 1, and all other


sites to unique addresses.

Use the 3-Way Modem Connect. Kit (p/n 099-108432-003) for the
following two steps:
Step 3

Connect the FarScan Master Site computer to the Master


Port on the Distribution Box (Part No. 050-108131-003,
part of 3-Way Modem Connect. Kit).

Step 4

Connect the hardware Master Sites to separate RS232C


ports (three available) on the Distribution Box as shown in
Figure 13-7.

TE
O

Modems in this application must be leased line and capable of


automatically establishing connection on power up and fades.
End of note.

14-21

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Figure 13-7

FarScan for Windows

Illustration showing connections to Distribution Box

14-22

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Application
Note #6

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Statistical Information Reporting

TE
NO

This application note was written for the DOS version of FarScan.
The functions and manual commands are the same for FarScan for
Windows.
Introduction
The DVM2/6/18-45Excell and MegaStar radio systems feature a new
tool, statistical information reporting, to help ensure proper
installation and to verify proper operation of the radio system and its
path. If problems develop, the tool enables the user to pinpoint the
troubled site(s) and to help diagnose the cause of the problem. Harris
engineers use the tool to verify the error-free performance of new
radios in the temperature chamber and in the field. It was used on the
first field trial of the DVM18-45 and during the installation of a very
large system. It was developed to help solve customers problems -identifying the location and inferring the probable cause of dribble
errors and synchronization losses on their systems.
Motivation
Before the tool was available, users would have to deploy bit error
rate (BER) test sets on a hop-by-hop basis and would have to displace
some of the traffic to make T1 lines available upon which to perform
BER tests. It used to be difficult to verify system performance once
the BER tests sets were no longer deployed. BER test sets are
expensive, are usually not installed where you need them when you
need them, and someone has to visit them frequently to read the data
or collect the print outs. It is difficult and time consuming to correlate
error events recorded by the test sets with the causes of those events.
Frequently multitrack strip chart recorders must be co-located with
the BER sets and time must be taken to correlate all the data.
Microwave radio paths that are well engineered tend to go for long
periods of time with no significant fading and the radios will then
operate essentially error free. Radios operating over difficult paths
will operate for long periods of time with no errors (no error seconds),
but then, when severe fading occurs, errors may occur frequently and
periods of very high error rate (severely errored seconds) will be
observed. Even synchronization losses (out of frame) events can

14-23

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

occur if the path is tough enough. Knowing just the long-term error
rate for such difficult paths is not nearly as useful as knowing when
error events and severely errored events are occurring.
Measurement Tools
The new tool enables the user to set up measurements of availability,
error rate performance, errored second events (time of event), severe
errored second (SES) performance, and out of frame indications
(OFI). Measurements may be made upon both on-line and off-line
receivers and inferences made of the performance of space diversity
improvement (dispersive improvement factor or DIF). All the
gathered data is time stamped with values from a single clock and is
stored on a magnetic media suitable for review in a number of ways
and suitable for export as a database for further exploration with a
database program.
FarScan is used to capture and record the available data and to initiate
and conclude some of the tests. There is too much information
available to store in the Protection/Alarm card or to display on the
Display/Keypad Panel so the tool is implemented by sending the data
to the FarScan computer for storage and display. Since the tool is
FarScan based, the user may do all their initial testing and reviewing
from the central site where the FarScan computer is installed. Of
course, FarScan on a lap top computer, attached to one end of the hop,
may also be used.
There are some limitations on the tool which should be understood.
Measurements are made on the T3 parity bits which are inserted by
the M2X card at the transmit end of a hop and measured at the receive
end of the same hop again on the M2X card. Since there is no parity
bit available at DS1 or DS2, there is no way to measure error rate
from the DS1 or DS2 signal source to the DVM multiplex, nor at the
data destination end from the DVM multiplex through the M12 cards
to the DS1 or DS2 signal user. For such measurements DS1 BER test
sets still have value.
Parity is calculated on blocks of data. DS3 was designed with only a
single parity bit and can detect only an odd number of errors within
the data block. Some error events will not be recorded because they
caused an even number of errors within the block over which parity
was calculated and inserted. It would have required two or more
parity bits to be defined in the DS3 signal to flag such error events.

14-24

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 14: Application Notes

In practice this is not a problem. Minor dribble error problems on the


64 QAM radios cause odd errors almost every time. Error bursts will
be caught at least 50% of the time and can usually be associated with
their cause. By contrast, a BER test set measuring on DS1 can only
examine one of the 28 DS1 lines and will take much longer to detect
an error problem than the measurements made with parity errors. If
two different BER test sets are used on two different DS1 lines on the
same radio and the path is experiencing a very low error rate of the
order of 1E-9, one will observe that error events on the two sets
usually occur at different times. There are 28 different DS1 lines on
the radio and each error event produces far less than 28 errors. The
errors that occur are randomly distributed over the 28 lines. Averaged
over a statistically significant number of events the two test sets will
agree about the bit error rate, but error events on the two will seldom
be in the same second.
Bit error rate (BER) measurements displayed on the keypad and by
FarScan on both the 64 QAM radios and on the QPSK radios are
accurate because multipliers are used to calculate the actual bit error
rate from the rate at which parity errors are detected. Different
multipliers are used for 64 QAM and for QPSK. These were
measured over a wide range of bit error rates caused by changes in
received signal level and agree very well in measurements with BER
test sets.
Automatic Measurements
Some measurements of the on-line receiver are made continuously
and are reported back to the FarScan computer every 18 hours. Other
automatic measurements cover a 7-day (168-hour) interval. The
18-hour and 7-day intervals were chosen to be in compliance with
BELL operating recommendation CB149. Data is recorded site-bysite and A side data is separate from B side data.
The data reported at 18 hour intervals may be explored with manual
commands as follows:
371
381
382
383
384

14-25

Statistical Reset Req.,


Total Parity ERR Count,
Total Parity ERR Count,
Out-Of-Frame Indicator,
Out-Of-Frame Indicator

Rx A/B
Rx A
Rx B
Rx A
Rx B

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

The response to 381 and 382 looks like this:


Total Parity ERR Counter = 2
Measurements Given Over the
Duration of 12719 Seconds
The response to 383 and 384 looks like this:
Synch Error Counter = ^0
Measurements Given Over the
Duration of 3910 Seconds
The counters for commands 381 through 384 will overflow if more
than 255 events occur within the 18 hours. One may reset the data in
the 18-hour counters with the following command:
371-a(lter)

Statistical Reset Req.,

Rx A/B

The data reported at 7-day intervals may be explored with manual


commands as follows:
371 <Alter>1
375
376
377
378
379
380
385
386

Statistical Reset Req.,


Parity ERR Free Seconds,
Parity ERR Free Seconds,
One Parity ERR Seconds,
One Parity ERR Second,
Severely Parity ERR,
Severely Parity ERR,
Measurement Duration Counter,
Measurement Duration Counter,

Rx A/B
Rx A
Rx B
Rx A
Rx B
A
B
A
B

The response to 375 and 376 looks like this:


System has logged
Parity Error Free Operation
For 94683 Seconds

1. <Alter> = choose Alter option after selecting the command.

14-26

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 14: Application Notes

The response to 377 and 378 looks like this:


System has Logged
One Parity Error
For ^0 Seconds ~

The response to 379 and 380 looks like this:


PEFS/OPES/SPES Measurements
Severely Parity Error
of ^0 Seconds ~

The response to 385 and 386 looks like this:


To Obtain the % Available
Divide PEFS Duration by
104187 Seconds (7 days MAX)

One may reset the data in the 7-day counters with the following
command:
371

Statistical Reset Req.,

Rx A/B

After 18 hours, the counters storing elapsed time near overflow so the
Protection/Alarm card sets a flag requesting attention from the
FarScan computer. The next time the site is addressed by FarScan the
data stored in the Protection/Alarm card is harvested and the
Protection/Alarm card resets its counters to zero time and starts the
process over again for the next 18 hours. The FarScan computer has
about five minutes to harvest the data after the service request flag
has been set. If AutoPoll has been disabled during this time the
Protection/Alarm will overflow and discard the data automatically.
FarScan logging must be enabled while the data is being harvested or
it will not be recorded.
FarScan manual commands may be used to gather data from any site
at any time before the 18- hour counters time out. Look at the group
of commands 371 to 386 in the manual command menu of FarScan
screen for DVM-45 equipment.

14-27

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Manual Measurements
FarScan may be used to gather additional data on interesting paths. A
test path may be set up to enable error event and BER measurements
to be made upon both on-line and off-line receivers. Manual
command 024 <Alter> and 025 <Alter> at a repeater site provide for
setting up and clearing a test path for these measurements.
FarScan commands 024 <Alter> and 025 <Alter> require choices by
the user which look like this1:
Do Alter Configuration
Set Test Path
Reset Parity ERR Count
Clear Test Path
Use the arrow keys to move up and down these four choices and use
the END key to enable the selection. The responses to each choice
follow:
Set Test Path sets up a test path and a 5-line response comes back
which looks like:
On, BER
<1E-10
A1
Off, BER
<1E-10
A2
On Line Parity ERR ^0
Off Line Parity ERR ^0
Test Path Set
Parity errors may be reset to zero at the start of a test. Use the third
choice to do this. The response will be:
A1 On,
BER
Radio Rx A2 Off ~
On Line Parity ERR

<1E-10
^0

1. Do Alter Configuration doesnt actually change anything and will be


corrected in next database. A 3-line or 5-line response comes back just
as the response to 024 <Inquiry> and 025 <Inquiry> provides.

14-28

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

If desired, the manual command 024 <Inquiry> or 025 <Inquiry>


may be repeated at intervals to see if there have been any error events.
Manual commands are the only way to set up a test of both on-line
and off-line receivers simultaneously. If BER must be reset to E-10
after an interval of poor BER use command 022 <Alter> for A side
and 023 <Alter> for B side.
It is not possible to set up test paths on both A side and B side
receivers at a repeater site because the standby M2X card is used to
measure error events and BER for the off-line receiver. The user
chooses whether measurements are made on the A side off-line
receiver or the B side off-line receiver.
SelectPoll Measurements
Long term tests may be made on a hop by creating a SelectPoll file
which uses commands 024 or 025 to repeatedly check for error
events. Start the test by setting up a test path with manual commands
024 <Alter> or 025 <Alter>. Both on-line and off-line receiver
performance will be recorded.
Measurements through FarScan on a repeater site may be
inadvertently interrupted by a craftsmen using the keypad at the radio
site to query the system. In particular, the BER MONITOR function
for the B(A) receivers given by the keypad would take down a test
path set up by FarScan for the A(B) receivers. The impact would be
that the on-line receiver would continue to be monitored by FarScans
SelectPoll queries but the off-line receiver measurements would be
lost. The reason for this limitation is again, that the standby M2X card
is used to measure error events and BER for the off-line receiver.
There is only one M2X card to standby for both the A side and B side
off-line receivers.
How Does One Use the Tool?
Users want a radio system which runs error free forever. If problems
develop, then they want to know how to fix the problem. They need
to know where the problem is and what to do about it. Has a
component failed? Is the path fading? Is the antenna system
damaged? One of the biggest challenges is to find out why
intermittent errors occur and how to fix them.
The straight-forward way Harris has used the tool to locate problems
is to create a SelectPoll file using the new commands 024 (and 025
for repeater sites) and run that SelectPoll file in addition to AutoPoll
all the time.

14-29

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

In cases where path problems are suspected, one may include


commands 176 and 177 for the hop being investigated to
continuously measure and log received signal level. This will greatly
increase the size of the log file on active paths. Harris recommends
limiting the use of commands 176 and 177 to an hour or so.
Logging is conducted at all times but Harris prefers to leave the
printer off to save paper. If a great deal of log review activity is
required, we suggest the user install FarScan on a second computer
and transfer log files from the computer doing the logging to the
second computer used just for reviewing log files. This, of course, is
permitted by the scope of the FarScan software license. FarScan G
allows concurrent logging and review on the same hardware platform
Log and review data for some desired test period and then examine
the summary screen.
Harris recommends the following sequence:
1. Create or recall the desired SelectPoll file.
2. Enable logging to file.
3. Press Control L and type in a message to note the nature of the
test. Press Return.
4. Press Control F3 to force all activities to be logged, independent
of past history.
5. Do all needed manual commands. They will all be logged and
may be reviewed if needed or in case of an operator error.
6. Enable SelectPoll to be displayed on the Summary screen.
7. Start Select Poll.
At the end of the test period, first examine the Summary Display.
BER for all the sites is displayed. If performance has been less than
E-10 at any location or if some other event has occurred of interest do
a print screen of the Summary Display. Push F3 to get to the main
screen and then disable SelectPoll and go to the Manual Menu and
again use commands 024 or 025 to determine if any parity errors have
occurred at the sites which looked interesting in the Summary
Display.

14-30

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Assuming that errors have occurred at some sites, then home in on the
troubled site. Disable Auto POLL and logging for the time being and
use review log to look more closely at the log file which has been
saved. One approach is to review the log file for the site chosen and
print the results. Another approach is to do a review log for one or all
sites looking for just command 024 (025) changes. In this way, the
user can find out exactly when the error events occurred. Once the
user knows when the events occurred, they can do a very thorough
review log of the troubled site starting some time before the error
event and looking at all the stored data until after the error event has
occurred.
Real Time Error Monitoring
One may home in on a particular site or a particular hop and watch
errors as they happen. Create a SelectPoll for just the one site or for
the two sites at the two ends of a hop. Use command 024 for receivers
in the A side and 025 for receivers in the B side. If the receivers are in
the A side at one site and in the B side at the other site, use just 024
for the first site and just 025 for the second site. Save the special
SelectPoll file under a readily recognized name. Note that your
equipment must have an M2X standby for off-line tests.
The user can cause just the SelectPoll responses to display by first
entering the Display Mode from the Main menu. This will look as
shown in the figure below. Change the selection to display Manual &
Select Poll.
Display Mode Menu
Summary Report Selection
Manual & SelectPoll

Activity

Manual AutoPoll
Manual Dual Port
Manual Only
ONE Line

Display
Format

Full Report
Change of Status
ALL Activity

14-31

Report

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Go to the SelectPoll menu and change the same parameter for about
2-second delay between inquiries and cycles as follows:
s)
c)

sites
cycles

=2
=2

Enable SelectPoll and AutoPoll. Press the F4 key to get the full
display of the manual and Select Poll responses. Every two seconds a
display of either three lines or five lines appears. 5-line displays apply
to those receivers where a test path has been manually set with
command 024(025). The 3-line display applies to receivers where no
test path is currently set. Under strong fading or other unfavorable
conditions the test path will be taken down automatically because the
M2X standby card is needed for other checking purposes by the
protection system. The two types of displays typically look like this:
A1
On, BER
<1E-10
A2
Off, BER
<1E-10
On Line Parity ERR ^0
Off Line Parity ERR ^0
Test Path Set
OR
On, BER
<1E-10
A1
Radio Rx A2 Off ~
On Line Parity ERR ^0

Every time there is an increase in the number of parity errors or a


change in the on-line receiver, or a change in test path status, the
display will be in a contrasting color to help flag the event. As long as
there has been no change from the previous inquiry to the same site,
the color is not altered. If one fades the path to an error rate about
1E-8, the parity errors count will change every few seconds and after
some period the BER will change down from BER<1E-10 to
BER<1E-9 and finally to BER<1E-8. The parity error events will be
changing long before BER change is displayed.
After a fade, the parity error count will stop changing the BER
display improves from BER <1E-8 to BER <1E-9 and finally to BER
<1E-10 sometime after.

14-32

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Summary
Experience and intuition are invaluable to the troubleshooter. The
next step(s) depend on what has been found. The user continues to
use the tool to break down the problem into smaller pieces until the
cause of the problem is found. FarScans statistical information tool
helps the user solve some problems and helps identify the location of
others.
End of note.

14-33

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

This page intentionally blank.

14-34

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Application
Note #7

DCE-to-DCE and DTE-to-DTE Ports and Cable


Pin Configurations
The following tables list the pin outs for making DCE-to-DCE and
DTE-to-DTE cables for full null modem connections, null
connections, and loopbacks. These are normal industry standard
cables not supplied by Harris.
Null Cables and Loopback Devices
DB9 Pin No.

DB25 Pin No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

8
3
2
20
7
6
4
5
22

DB25-to-DB25 Null Cable

DB9-to-DB9 Null Cable

DB25 Pin No.

DB25 Pin No.

DB9 Pin No.

DB9 Pin No.

2
3
7
8
20

3
2
7
20
8

2
3
5
1
4

3
2
5
4
1

DB9-to-DB25 Null Cable

Loopback Devices

DB9 Pin No.

DB25 Pin No.

DB25

DB9

2
3
5
1
4

2
3
7
20
8

Pin 2 -Pin 3
Pin 4 -Pin 5
Pins 6-8-20

Pin 2-Pin3
Pin 7-Pin 8
Pins 1-4-6

End of note.

14-35

DTE Pin/Signal Description


Carrier Detect (CD)
Receive Data (RxD), input
Transmit Date (TxD), output
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Signal Ground (SIG GND)
Data Set Ready (DSR)
Request to Send (RTS)
Clear to Send (CTS)
Ring Indicator (RI)

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

This page intentionally blank.

14-36

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Application
Note #8

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Connecting a FarScan Computer to the


GlobeStar Radio
A FarScan computer connects to the CMPTR connection in the upper
user interface area, under the top of the GlobeStar SPU. See the
Locator Diagram at the front of the GlobeStar Instruction Manual for
the location of this connector.
CMPTR is a female DB9 connector, incompatible with the standard
cable supplied with FarScan. To connect a FarScan terminal to
CMPTR, use one of the following alternative cables:
1. Cable 087-099852-025 to connect to a DB25 connector on the
terminal, or
2. Cable 087-099853-025 to connect to a DB9 connector on the
terminal.
Figure 4 shows the wiring diagrams for these two cables.

14-37

9-PIN
MALE DCE
CONNECTOR

PIN NO.

RX DATA

TX DATA

SG (GND)

DCD

25-PIN
FEMALE DTE
CONNECTOR

TO PC DB25
RS-232 CONNECTOR

9-PIN
FEMALE DTE
CONNECTOR

TO PC DB9
RS-232 CONNECTOR

(a) Cable No. 087-099852-025

PIN NO.

TO GLOBESTAR CMPT
OR DISPLAY CONNECTOR

9-PIN
MALE DCE
CONNECTOR

SIGNAL

PIN NO.

RX DATA

TX DATA

SG (GND)

DCD

(a) Cable No. 087-099853-025

14-38

FarScan for Windows

Wiring Diagrams for FarScan-GlobeStar Connection

TO GLOBESTAR CMPT
OR DISPLAY CONNECTOR

SIGNAL

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Figure 13-8

PIN NO.

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Application
Note #9

Hayes Optima 24 Modem


This application note applies if you received a Hayes Optima 24
modem with your FarScan system.
This modem must be set with the following software settings to work
properly with FarScan applications:
2400
AT&F
ATE1M1N3Q0S0=3S36=1S37=0S48=128W0X1&C1&D1&K0
&Q0&R1&S0&T5&W0
AT&Y0
AT&Z0
Effective March 8, 1993, all FarScan systems will be shipped with the
OPTIMA24.MSF file. This file contains the above commands and
should be selected for setting up the modem using the FarScan
SetModem Utility.
End of note.

14-39

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

This page intentionally blank.

14-40

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Application
Note #10

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Hayes ACCURA 288 Modem


This application note applies if you received a Hayes ACCURA 288
modem with your FarScan system.
In order for it to work properly with FarScan, the modem needs to be
set as follows:

9600
ATE1

(Echo from keyboard to screen)

AT&F

(Restore to factory setting)

AT&C1* (Tracks presence of Carrier Detect signal)


AT&D0* (Ignore DTR signal)
AT&K0

(Disable flow control)

AT&S0* (Assert DSR signal always)


AT&Q6

(Communicates asynchronously with auto-speed


buffer for interfaces that require constant speed
between the DTE and the DCE)

AT&W0

(Stores profile 0)

AT&Y0

(Profile 0 will be retrieved on power up)

ATZ0

(Reset and recall stored user profile 0)

*These items are factory default settings.


End of note.

14-41

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

14-42

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Application
Note #11

Intel 144/144e Modem


The following settings must be used when using an Intel 144/144e
modem:
AT&F

(Restore to factory setting)

AT&D0

(Ignore DTR signal)

AT\N0

(Normal connection)

AT\Q0

(Disable flow control)

AT\V3

(Result codes show DTE speed)

AT%C0

(Disable MNP 5 data compress)

AT-J0

(Disable error control detection phase)

AT&W0

(Stores profile 0)

AT&Y0

(Profile 0 will be retrieved when power down)

On Dual Port Connections:


When a Dual Port connection is used with the Intel 144/144e Modem,
it is not uncommon to get a
SCH: DUAL PORT COMM ERROR, TAG= ##
error message at the bottom of the screen after a disconnection is
made.
End of note.

14-43

Chapter 14: Application Notes

This page intentionlly blank.

14-44

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Application
Note #12

Connecting a FarScan Terminal to the


MicroStar Radio
This application note is valid for:
MicroStar 13/15/18/23 GHz and 38 GHz radios with capacities of
4-8 E11/T1
MicroStar Plus 38 GHz radios with capacities of 1, 2, or 4 E1
Requirements
FARSCAN for DOS, version 4.05 or higher; or FarScan for
Windows, version 1.00 or higher.
Make the Physical Connection
Connect the FarScan terminal to the RTU port on the IDU by means
of a standard cable with DB9 connectors on both ends as shown in the
figure below. Use an adapter if necessary.

Cable Wiring Diagrams


DCD 1

1 DCD

FARSCAN
COMPUTER
9-PIN DB-9
RS-232C

2 RX DATA

TX DATA 2

3 TX DATA

RX DATA 3

5 GND

GND 5

DTE

DCE

8 DCD

3 RX DATA

25-PIN DB-25 2 TX DATA

DB-25 TO DB-9
3
ADAPTER

FARSCAN
COMPUTER

RS-232C

7 GND

GND

DTE

1. E1 represents the CEPT 2 Mbit/s data rate.

14-45

MICROSTAR
IDU
RTU PORT
9-PIN
FEMALE DB-9
RS-232C

DCD 1

MICROSTAR
IDU
RTU PORT
RX DATA 3
9-PIN
GND 5 FEMALE DB-9
RS-232C
TX DATA 2

DCE

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Configure the RTU port


Using either the CIT software or the embedded control software
(VT-100 interface), configure the RTU port as COMPUTER with a
baud rate of 9600 b/s
Configure FarScan for DOS
If you are using FarScan for DOS, from the main menu go to the
MODIFY SETUP, COMMUNICATION menu and set the MODEM
STATUS/CONTROL item to OFF
Configure FarScan for Windows
If you are using FarScan for Windows, click on CONNECTION in
the main window, then click SETUP in the window that appears.
Deselect CHECK HARDWARE CONNECTION.
End of note.

14-46

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Application
Note #13

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan Master Equipment Number


When Farscan is connected to the connected to Constellation
(FarScan, Versatility, Monitor ports) or MegaStar (Aux, Spur ports)
the FarScan Master Equipment Number must be a unique address
within the FarScan Network. Duplication of an address will cause
unreliable FarScan results.
The Master Equipment Number entry is described on pages 4-11, step
3. The Master Equipment Number entered during this operation must
not be duplicated on any of the equipment in the FarScan Network.
Any equipment type monitored by FarScan with connectivity to the
FarScan you are configuring is considered part of the FarScan
Network.
End of note.

14-47

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Chapter 14: Application Notes

Application
Note #14

Connecting a FarScan Terminal to the


Constellation Radio
Step 1

Add a fictitious site to the current equipment file using the


Equipment File Editor.
[a] Assign a site number (other than 0) that is not already
in use.
[b] Assign a hardware address (between 1 and 999) that is
not already in use. Uncheck the Wait for response
from address 0 box.
[c] Set the equipment type for this fictitious site to
unknown.

Step 2

Connect the FarScan computers RJ45 cable to the FarScan


port on the Constellation back-plane (lower right corner).

Step 3

Before you turn the FarScan connection online, click


Setup in the System Connection window.

Step 4

Uncheck the Check Hardware Connection box.

Step 5

Use the Constellation keypad to check the baud rate


settings. They should be identical to those in FarScan. (If
not, change them.)
Keypad selection: CONFIGURATION > SYSTEM >
COMM PORT SETTINGS

Step 6

Send a manual command to make sure the connection has


been made.

End of note.

14-48

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan for Windows

Index
Symbols
*.dva 3-10, 3-12
*.eqt 3-10, 4-16, 6-6
*.eqw 3-10, 6-6
*.log 7-3
*.mgy 3-10
*.mgz 3-10, 3-12
*.nkp 4-16
*.pol 4-16
*.sit 3-10
~ 11-19, 11-21
Numerics
060 Users Editable Labels 11-19
A
abnormal condition 9-3
report 1-3
About FarScan 4-6
access
change 5-3
level, switch 4-7
menu bar 4-7
preventing 5-5
request, sending 4-19
user levels 5-3
acknowledge alarms 4-7, 7-26
acknowledge all alarms 4-7
Acknowledging a Page 12-19
activating backup generator
example 11-48
active paging status 12-11
active user 5-7

activity
equipment, selecting 12-10
activity log
equipment 7-3
activity log, equipment 1-7
add a location 12-6
Add User window 5-6
adding a user 5-6
Adding IP Addresses 13-5
address 1-4
address association 13-4
alarm
audible 7-4
change frequency 7-32
customize sound 7-32
gone 7-4
latched 9-6
report 1-3
symbols, configuration 7-34
alarm conditions
Ground 11-34
Open 11-34
Alarm Panel 4-5
Alarm Relay Kits 14-9
DS1/DS2 Relay 14-12
External Alarm Relay 14-9
Installation procedure 14-16
Alarm Validation 12-16
alarms
acknowledge 4-7, 7-26
acknowledge all 4-7
beeper 4-7
latched 9-5
new 7-26
radio 4-9

I-1

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Index

all activity 7-19


Alt+M 4-7
analog input parameters, setting 11-38
analog parameters 11-39
Analog scaling factor 11-28
APoll LED
blue 9-8
green 9-8
yellow 9-8
appending an equipment file 6-11
archived disk log files 7-12
ASCII paging 12-13
Assign Paging Priority 12-10
Assigning IP Addresses 13-6
Assigning Messages 12-14
assistance, technical 1-3
Attempts before the Next Person is Paged
12-17
Audible Alarm 4-5
audible alarm 7-4
changing 7-32
turn on or off 7-32
authorization, user 5-3
Authorize 4-6, 5-4
authorized user 1-9
automatic polling 1-6
AutoPoll 1-6, 4-5, 9-3
copying responses 9-9
delay 9-7
enable or disable 6-9, 6-11
erroneous responses 9-4
gray background 9-5
LED 9-8
master FarScan 9-3
master system 9-5
monitor system 9-6
pause 9-8
remote FarScan 9-4
responses, erroneous 2-3
shut down by Master message 9-4
simultaneous 9-4

I-2

stop 9-8
using 9-7
AutoPoll/SelectPoll Access 5-3
B
battery failure
imminent 11-46
baud rate settings 4-20
beep 7-32, 9-8
changing 7-32
turn off 9-8
beeping
turn on or off 4-7
Bias Reading 11-40
block of messages 11-23
blue
APoll LED 9-8
LED 4-9
Boolean algebra 11-28
boolean equations 11-43
Broadcasting 4-5
buffer, clearing 6-13
buttons 4-8
authorize user 4-8
AutoPoll 4-8
broadcast messages 4-8
customer-edited messages on/off 4-8
database 1-3
dual port connection 4-8
equipment file editor 4-8
equipment/operator messages 4-8
file information 4-8
flush print log 4-8
help 4-4
log mode setting 4-8
manual commands 4-8
Quit FarScan 4-8
review log 4-8
SelectPoll 4-8
SelectPoll file editor 4-8

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

summary view on/off 4-8


system connection 4-8
C
cable
FarScan interface 1-10
null modem 2-7
radio-to-modem 2-7
RS232 4-20
Cable pin configurations
DCE-to-DCE 14-35
DTE-to-DTE 14-35
Null Cables 14-35
carrier detect 4-20
change
equipment name 6-8
of status 7-19
radio type 6-9
site address 6-8
Change Access 4-5
change access 5-3
Change Equipment 11-19
Change Zone Colors 12-12
changing
audible alarm 7-32
symbols 7-33
changing message text 11-36
Check Hardware Connection 4-12, 4-13, 418, 4-20
classes, training 1-4
clear data 6-13
clear Summary Display 4-7
clock, computer 7-6
code (firmware)
DVA 2-3
DVM 2-3
DVM-45
Excell 2-3
non-Excell 2-3
DVT 2-3

FarScan for Windows

MegaStar 2-3
required 2-3
colors
changing summary display 7-35
default 7-35
equipment number 12-15
LED 4-9
COM port 4-18
settings 4-18
Command 071 11-50
command 890 11-49
commands
2DM 8-10
display/keypad 8-3
manual 1-6
manual, sending 8-3
Community, SNMP 13-8
computer
connection 2-6
master FarScan 2-4
monitoring master 2-5
remote FarScan 2-5
computers clock 7-6
computers, daisy chain 4-10
Configuration
Alarm Panel 4-5
Audible Alarm 4-5
AutoPoll 4-5
Customer Edited Messages 4-5
Dual Port 1 Setup 4-5
FarScan Colors 4-5
FarScan Number 4-5
Log File/Printer Mode 4-5
Master Equipment Number 4-5
Pager System Configuration 4-5
SelectPoll 4-5
System Port Setup 4-5
Configuration menu 4-5
configuring SelectPoll 10-15
Configuring the Pager System 12-16
connecting

I-3

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Index

FarScan 4-10
Master FarScan 4-10
connection
direct 1-10, 2-6
dual port 1 connection 4-5
error 4-20
local 1-10
lost 4-20
MegaStar 3-13, 3-15
menu 4-5
modem 1-10
remote 2-7
system connection 4-5
VersaT1lity 3-13, 3-15
Constellation, connecting to 14-48
Contents 4-6
context-sensitive help 4-4
convert
DVA parameters (*.DVA) 3-10
edited messages (*.mgz) 3-10
equipment files (*.EQT) 3-10
site files (*.sit) 3-10
converter
FarScan 3-10
converting FarScan DOS files 3-10
copying DVA parameter settings 11-29
Copying Edited Messages 11-22
copying, password file 4-16
Create Equipment Locations 12-4
creating an equipment file 6-7
Ctrl+b 4-7
Ctrl+d 4-7
Ctrl+E 9-8
Ctrl+e 4-7
Ctrl+F3 4-7
Ctrl+F6 4-7
Ctrl+F7 4-7
Current Date/Time 4-6
Customer Edited Messages 4-5
Customer Resource Center 1-3
customize

I-4

polling 10-3
summary display 7-30
text 1-9
customizing the view
message editor 11-24
cycles, delay 9-7
D
daisy chain 4-10, 4-16
more than one 9-4
problems 9-4
data channels 1-10
database
editor 1-9
equipment 6-3
file 6-3
loading 6-3
network 6-3
database, open Utilities 11-6
database, using concurrent 11-5
DB button 1-3
Debounce delays 11-13
debounce period 11-28
Define Access Priorities 5-3
definition
equipment 1-6
Master FarScan 2-4
definitions
PAI 11-45
delay 11-36
AutoPoll 9-7
cycles 9-7
equipment 9-7
inquiries 9-7
Delay Between Pages in Minutes 12-17
delays 11-34
Delete a Person 12-12
deleting a user 5-7
direct notification 12-13
Direct Notification Port 12-17

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

disable
AutoPoll 6-9, 6-11
log file 7-24
polling capabilities 4-7
user access 5-7
Disable Poll to Dual 4-5
disk log 7-3, 7-5
enabling 7-7
file 7-7
file, reviewing 7-12
display/keypad 8-3
DM products 11-19
DOS2EQW 3-10
dual port 2-5, 4-16
connection 4-14
enabling 4-14
setup 4-14
dual port 1 connection 4-5
Dual Port 1 Setup 4-5
Dual1 LED
white 4-20
duration 11-36
DVA 9-8
firmware code 2-3
memory updates 9-8
parameters, converting 3-10
DVA equipment, resetting 11-49
DVA input parameters 11-13
icons 11-16
shortcuts 11-15
DVA input parameters menu 11-14
DVA Output 11-36
DVA parameters
copying 11-29
setting input 11-32
DVA parameters, setting 11-28
DVA product 11-19
DVA real time stamping 11-50
DVA straps 11-40
DVM
firmware code 2-3

FarScan for Windows

DVM-45
Excell, firmware code 2-3
non-Excell, firmware code 2-3
DVT
firmware code 2-3
E
Edit Attributes window 5-5, 5-7
Edit Equipment Locations 12-7
edited messages
FarScan 4.0 11-17
editing
equipment file 6-8
symbols 7-33
users 5-4, 5-5
Editing IP Addresses 13-6
editing messages 11-3, 11-17
emergency 1-3
enable
AutoPoll 6-9, 6-11
dual port 4-14
equipmentl port 4-12
poll to dual 4-19, 9-4, 9-8
polling capabilities 4-7
system port 4-12
Enable Poll to Dual 4-5
enable SNMP services 13-10
enabled Dual Port 2-5
enabling
disk log 7-7
log mode 7-6
print log 7-10
text log 7-8
Enabling Messages 11-21
equations 11-28, 11-45
Equipment 12-3
equipment
activity log 7-3, 7-5, 9-5
database 4-16, 6-3
definition 1-6

I-5

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Index

delay 9-7
doesnt respond 4-20
entering number of 6-7
file 6-3
appending 6-11
converting, FarScan 3.26
converting
equipment files 3-10
creating 6-7
editing 6-8
editor 6-5
loading 6-6
loading automatically 4-4
printing 6-12
files 3-12
converting 3-10
name, change 6-8
number, master 4-11
equipment activity 12-10
equipment activity log 1-7
Equipment File Editor 4-6
equipment locations, create 12-4
equipment locations, editing 12-7
equipment locations, selecting 12-6
equipment port
enabling 4-12
Equipment/Operator 4-5
EQW 3-10
erroneous responses 2-3
error
no connection 4-20
example
setting values 11-40, 11-41
extensions
*.eqw 6-6
*.log 7-3
External Control Relays 14-19
Programmable 14-19
External Message Editor 11-9
external message editor
icons 11-12

I-6

menu 11-9
shortcuts 11-11
F
F1 4-7
F10 4-7
F2 4-7
F3 4-7
F5 4-7
F6 4-7
factory default commands 11-18
FarScan
activity log 1-7
computer 1-10
direct 3-13
master 2-4, 3-15
monitoring master 2-5
remote 2-5, 4-16
requirements 2-3
Converter 3-10
daisy chain 4-10
functions 1-5
interface cable 1-10, 2-6
part number 2-6
Log Review program 7-5
main window 4-5
number 4-11
shortcuts 4-7
software 1-11
starting 4-3
status 4-9
system connection 4-10
System Manager 5-3
FarScan 3.26
converting
DVA parameters 3-10
site files 3-10
FarScan 4.0 edited messages 11-17
FarScan 4.0x
converting equipment files 3-10

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

FarScan Colors 4-5


FarScan DOS
converting files 3-10
FarScan Number 4-5
FarScan Summary Display 11-19
FarScan utilities 11-17
fast keys 4-7
file
flush print log 4-5
open 4-5
printer font setup 4-5
printer setup 4-5
File menu 4-5
File Status 4-6
firmware code
DVA 2-3
DVM 2-3
DVM-45
Excell 2-3
non-Excell 2-3
DVT 2-3
MegaStar 2-3
requirements 2-3
flashing
green/white Sys LED 4-20
red LED 4-9
red Sys LED 4-20
floppy disk
saving to 7-20
Flush Print Log 6-13
flush print log 4-5
font setup 4-5
Full Scale 11-40
full status display 7-9, 7-11, 7-18
G
global inquiry 9-3
global paging on/off 12-16
GlobeStar radio 14-37
gone alarm 7-4

FarScan for Windows

gray background 9-5


green
APoll LED 9-8
LED 4-9
Sys LED 4-19
Sys LED, no response 4-20
green/white flashing
Sys LED 4-20
Ground alarm condition 11-34
Group 1 11-13
Group 2 11-13
Group 3 11-13
H
hardware
interface 1-10
Hardware installation
Relay Box 14-14, 14-15
Relay Expansion Card 14-14, 14-15
hardwire connection 1-10
Harris address 1-4
Hayes-compatible modems 3-15
Help
About FarScan 4-6
Contents 4-6
help
buttons 4-4
context-sensitive 4-4
menu 4-6
online 4-4
Help Line 4-6
I
icon bar 4-8
icons
DVA input parameters 11-16
external message editor 11-12
main Utilities 11-8
relocating 11-24

I-7

Index

ID code, database 1-3


Ignore Summary Report 11-21
imminent battery failure 11-46
inactive paging status 12-11
inactive user 5-7
index, log 7-21
input parameter settings 11-13
Input polarity 11-28
inquiries
delay 9-7
global 9-3
installation terms 2-4
interface cable
FarScan 1-10, 2-6
interrogation commands 10-3
IP Addresses
adding 13-5
assigning 13-6
editing 13-6
removing 13-6
K
keyboard
shortcuts 4-7
using 1-5
L
latched alarms 9-5, 9-6
clearing 9-6
latching relay 11-37
leased-line modem 1-10
LED
AutoPoll 9-8
blue 4-9
color definitions 4-9
flashing red 4-9
green 4-9
white 4-9
white Sys 4-20

I-8

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

yellow 4-9
APoll 9-8
lesser-than symbol 11-45
levels
user access 5-3
line drivers 1-10
load a SelectPoll file 10-12
loading
database 6-3
equipment file 6-6
messages 5-10, 5-12
local connection 1-10
location
adding a 12-6
editing equipment 12-7
selecting 12-6
Locations 12-3
locations, create equipment 12-4
locations, multiple 12-5
log
all activity 7-11
Change of Status 7-11
contents 7-21
equipment activity 7-3
FarScan 1-7
file
disabling 7-24
saving to floppy disk 7-20
view 7-12
mode, enabling 7-6
Log File Transfer 4-5
Log File/Printer Mode 4-5
Log Review 4-5
FarScan 7-5
logging on FarScan Utilities 11-6
logical AND 11-45
logical NOT 11-45
logical operators 11-43
logical OR 11-45
Logon Capability 5-3
long messages 11-21

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

lost connection 4-20


Lower Limits 11-40
M
main menu
Configuration 4-5
Connection 4-5
File 4-5
Help 4-6
icons 4-8
Operation 4-5
popup menus 4-5
Utilities 4-6
View 4-6
main menu, Utilities 11-7
main window, FarScan 4-5
Managers, SNMP 13-7
Manual Command 4-5
manual command list
1DM 8-8
1URB 8-14
1URB_1DM 8-18
1URB_2DM 8-20
2URB 8-16
2URB_1DM 8-22
3DM 8-12
CAU 8-24
DV12/16T 8-36
DVA 8-24
DVL_44 8-28
DVM_45 8-29
DVM_8T 8-32
DVM_DS3 8-34
DVM6-8T/12T 8-32
DVT_12 8-36
DVT_16 8-38
DVT_44 8-28
DVT_8 8-36
GSTAR 8-39
GSTAR_ME 8-41

FarScan for Windows

MEGASTAR 8-43
MicroStar 8-45
MicroStar_P 8-47
QLINK 8-49
Qlink_II 8-50
manual commands 1-6
access 5-3
display/keypad 8-3
sending 8-3
masks, subnet 13-6
master
equipment
address 4-16
number 4-11
systems 9-5
Master Equipment Number 4-5
Master FarScan 2-4
AutoPoll 9-3
connecting 4-10
recommended uses 2-4
maximum delay 11-36
MegaStar
firmware code 2-3
memory updates, DVA 9-8
menu
DVA input parameters 11-14
external message editor 11-9
message
editor 1-9
file, open 4-7
Message Assignment 4-6
message assignment 12-14
Message Editing 11-3
message editor
column order 11-25
column width 11-27
customizing the view 11-24
panes displayed 11-26
text appearance 11-27
message text
changing 11-36

I-9

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Index

Message Window 4-6


messages
AutoPoll shut down by Master 9-4
loading 5-10, 5-12
no response 2-3, 9-4
posting 5-9
reviewing 5-11
site/operator 1-9, 5-9
messages, editing 11-17
MGY 3-10
MGZ 3-10
MIB 13-3
mini status display 7-8, 7-10, 7-18
minimum delay 11-36
minimum requirements, computer 2-3
modem 12-9
connection 1-10, 4-13, 4-18
leased-line 1-10
not supplied by Harris 3-16
pause 12-9
monitor control groups 11-13
monitor systems 9-5
monitor temperature 11-40
monitor voltage 11-40
monitor/control group 11-33, 11-36, 11-39
mouse, using a 1-5
multiple locations 12-5
Multiple-Site Master Systems 14-21
N
network database 6-3
new alarms 7-25
no connection 4-20
no response
green Sys LED 4-20
message 2-3, 9-4
normal condition 11-43
Notepad, Windows 9-9
notification, direct 12-13
number

I-10

FarScan 4-11
master equipment 4-11
numbers, zone 12-5
O
one line display 7-8, 7-10, 7-18
online help 4-4
online printer 1-7
open
broadcast message editor 4-7
manual command 4-7
message file 4-7
online help 4-7
Open alarm condition 11-34
open file 4-5
open Utilities database 11-6
operating parameters 11-3
Operation
AutoPoll 4-5
Broadcasting 4-5
Change Access 4-5
Disable Poll to Dual 4-5
Enable Poll to Dual 4-5
Equipment/Operator 4-5
Log File Transfer 4-5
Log Review 4-5
Manual Command 4-5
Pager Confirmation 4-5
SelectPoll 4-5
Summary Display 4-5
Operation menu 4-5
Output control delay 11-28
overflow 14-26
overrange 11-43
P
page, acknowledging 12-19
pager activity 12-10
Pager Confirmation 4-5

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Pager Log File 4-6, 12-17


Pager System 12-3
Pager System Configuration 4-5
Pager System Port 12-17
pager system, configuring 12-16
Paging 1-9
paging
ASCII 12-13
tone 12-13
paging activity, viewing 12-18
paging status
active 12-11
inactive 12-11
paging types, setting up 12-13
PAI 11-43
PAI boolean equation operators 11-45
PAI definitions 11-45
Paintbrush 7-33
panel relays 11-43
parameters, operating 11-3
paramtr.dva 3-10, 3-12
paramtr4.dva 3-10
part number
FarScan interface cable 2-6
password 4-3
enable/disable 5-3
file 4-16
file, copying 4-16
full access 4-3
level 0 4-3
Level 7 access 4-3
limited access 4-3
password, FarScan utilities 11-6
pasting edited messages 11-22
pause
AutoPoll 9-8
SelectPoll 10-16
persons name, selecting 12-9
Personnel File 12-3
Personnel File Editor 4-6
personnel file, setting up 12-9

FarScan for Windows

personnel, deleting 12-12


pins 11-13
PIO Address 14-17
PIO cards 11-17
pitch, alarm 7-4
playback delay 7-17
plug-in
SNMP 13-3
poll file 4-16, 6-3
polling
automatic 1-6
customized 10-3
popup menu 4-5
post messages 5-9
prevent access 5-5
print
SelectPoll file 10-14
print log 7-3
AutoPoll 7-10
Dual Port 7-10
enabling 7-10
errors 7-10
manual commands 7-10
SelectPoll 7-10
print log, flush 4-5
printer
clear buffer 7-11
clearing buffer 6-13
setup 6-12
printer font setup 4-5
printer setup 4-5
printer, online 1-7
printing an equipment file 6-12
Printing Edited Messages 11-23, 11-31
priority, paging 12-10
problems
connection 4-20
product
availability 1-11
support 1-3
training 1-4

I-11

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Index

Programmable Alarm Indicators 11-28


programmable alarm indicators 11-43
programming DVA equipment 11-28
pulse duration 11-28
pulsing relay 11-37
Q
quit FarScan 4-7
R
radio type, change 6-9
radios
number of 6-7
range limits 11-28
recognition delays 11-13
recommended uses
Master FarScan 2-4
Remote FarScan 2-5
red
flashing Sys LED 4-20
LED 4-9
responses 9-8
Sys LED 4-13
relay controls set 11-49
relay, editing 11-36
remote connect request 4-7
Remote FarScan
assigning numbers 4-17
AutoPoll 9-4
computer 4-16
recommended uses 2-5
remove tilde 11-21
Removing IP Addresses 13-6
report, summary 1-7
reporting
equipment activity log 1-7
summary 1-7
reports 1-7
abnormal condition 1-3

I-12

alarm 1-3
request for access 4-19
requirements
FarScan computer 2-3
firmware code 2-3
resetting DVA equipment 11-49
response messages 1-9
responses
copying 9-9
red 9-8
reviewing
disk log file 7-12
messages 5-11
RS232 cable 4-20
S
screen capture 1-3
security 1-9
Select Equipment Locations 12-6
Select the Persons Name 12-9
selecting equipment messages 12-15
SelectPoll 1-6, 4-5, 10-3
configuring 10-15
cycles 10-15
equipments 10-15
inquiries 10-15
load a file 10-12
pause 10-16
print a file 10-14
setting up 10-3
start 10-16
stop 10-16
using 10-16
SelectPoll File Editor 4-6
sending manual commands 8-3
Set as Default 6-4
set changes as default 11-30
set system
major and minor LEDs 2-3
minor LEDs 2-3

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

setting analog input parameters 11-38


setting DVA parameters 11-28
setting input parameters 11-32
setting PAI logical equations 11-43
setting relay output parameters 11-35
setting temperature 11-41
Setting Up Paging Types 12-13
Setting Up the Personnel File 12-9
setup
dual port 4-14
font 4-5
printer 4-5, 6-12
Shift+F3 4-7
Shift+F6 4-7
Shift+F7 4-7, 4-19
Shift+F9 4-7
shortcuts
DVA input parameters 11-15
external message editor 11-11
keyboard 4-7
main Utilities 11-8
site files 3-12
converting 3-10
site/operator messages 1-9
editing 5-9
Site/Operator window 5-9, 5-11
SNMP 13-3
Service Configuration window 13-4
SNMP Community 13-8
SNMP managers 13-7
SNMP, enabling 13-10
software 1-11
serial number 1-3
stamping, real time 11-50
start SelectPoll 10-16
starting FarScan 4-3
starting SNMP 13-10
Statistical Information Reporting 14-23
Automatic Measurements 14-25
Introduction 14-23
Manual Measurements 14-28

FarScan for Windows

Measurement Tools 14-24


Motivation 14-23
Real Time Error Monitoring 14-31
SelectPOLL Measurements 14-29
Summary 14-33
status
bar, description 4-9
FarScan 4-9
LEDs 4-9
system 9-3
viewing network 7-25
Status Line 4-6
Status/Time Stamping Latched 11-50
stop
AutoPoll 9-8
SelectPoll 10-16
subnet masks 13-6
Summary Display 4-5, 11-19
summary display 7-4
changing colors 7-35
customizing 7-30
viewing 7-25
summary report 1-7
summary view
symbols 7-33
support, technical 1-3
switch access level 4-7
symbols
editing 7-33
Sys LED
flashing red 4-20
green 4-19
green, no response 4-20
green/white flashing 4-20
red 4-13
white 4-13
yellow 4-18
system connection 4-5
system management 1-9
System Manager 5-3
system port

I-13

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

Index

enabling 4-12
System Port Setup 4-5
system status 9-3
systems
master 9-5
monitor 9-5
T
technical support 1-3
telephone line
leased 1-10
public 1-10
Telephone Number 4-18
terms
equipment 2-4
FarScan hardware 2-4
installation 2-4
Master FarScan 2-4
Monitor FarScan 2-4
text log 7-3
all activity 7-9
AutoPoll 7-8
Change of Status 7-9
Dual Port 7-8
enabling 7-8
errors 7-8
manual commands 7-8
SelectPoll 7-8
text paging 12-13
text-only file 1-7
tilde 11-19, 11-21
tilde, removing 11-21
time between display 7-17
time-stamp 9-5
toggle summary view 4-7
Tone Paging 12-13
Toolbars 4-6
traffic-affecting situation 1-3
training, product 1-4
transducers 11-40

I-14

trap 13-3
Trap Destination 13-7, 13-9
Trap request 13-7
trouble ticket 7-4, 7-25, 7-28
acknowledging alarms 7-29
printing 7-29
viewing 7-28
turn off the beeping 9-8
U
unauthorized access, preventing 4-3
underrange 11-43
Update when requested 11-50
updates, DVA memory 9-8
Upper and lower analog limits 11-43
Upper Limits 11-40
user
access levels 5-3
adding 5-6
authorized 1-9
deleting 5-7
disabling access 5-7
editing 5-4
removing 5-5
status
active 5-5
inactive 5-5
users
editing 5-5
using
AutoPoll 9-7
manual commands
manual commands
using 8-3
SelectPoll 10-16
Utilities
Authorize 4-6
Equipment File Editor 4-6
main icons 11-8
main menu 11-7

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

main shortcuts 11-8


Message Assignment 4-6
Personnel File Editor 4-6
SelectPoll File Editor 4-6
Zone Allocation 4-6
utilities 1-9
menu 4-6
Utilities main window 11-7
Utilities password 11-6
V
View
Current Date/Time 4-6
File Status 4-6
Help Line 4-6
Message Window 4-6
Pager Log File 4-6
Status Line 4-6
Toolbars 4-6
View menu 4-6
view paging activity 12-18
View Summary screen 7-30
View Summary window 7-25
viewing
summary display 7-25
trouble tickets 7-28
volts 11-40
W
white
Dual1 LED 4-20
LED 4-9
Sys LED 4-13, 4-20
window
Add User 5-6
Alarm Acknowledge 7-26
Audible Alarm Options 7-32
Clear View Summary 7-26, 7-27
Colors 7-35

FarScan for Windows

Command Selection 7-15


Edit Attributes 5-5
Equipment Command Selection 7-17
Equipment File Editor 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 68, 6-11
Equipment Selection 7-14
Equipment Type Selection for Review
7-16
Log Display Advanced Options 7-18
Log File Transfer 7-20
Log File/Printer Mode 7-6
Log Review 7-13, 7-15
Log Review main 7-12
Manual Command 8-3
Open Database 6-3
Site/Operator 5-9, 5-11
Summar Display - Alarm Options 7-34
User List 5-4
View Summary 7-25, 7-30
Windows
clipboard 9-9
notepad 9-9
WinZip 7-7
working hours, pager 12-10
Y
yellow
APoll LED 9-8
LED 4-9
Sys LED 4-18
Z
Zone Allocation 4-6
zone colors, changing 12-12
zone numbers 12-5
Zones 12-3

I-15

Index

Harris Corporation
Microwave Communications Division

This page intentionally blank.

I-16

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen